beginners 1(3)

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/beginners-13 1/299

●●●●●●R R eeaad d T T hheeoor r y y ..OOr r g g © © 2 2 0 0 110 0 EEnngglliisshhFFoor r EEvveer r yyoonnee..OOr r gg © © 2 2 0 0 0 0 8 8

Name ________________ Date ________________

EExxeer r cciissee 11 Using the Verb "To be"

Write the correct form of the verb "To be" in p pr r eesseennt t t t eennssee.

10) John (be) _____ excited.

11) Tiffany and Uma (be) _____

my friends.

12) Ricardo, John and I (be) _____

watching a movie.

13) Hadil (be) _____ kind.

14) Alisa (be) _____ young.

15) The hammer (be) _____ new.

16) My mother and father (be)

_____ cooking dinner.

17) Rachel (be) _____ driving to

school.

18) Nikkos and Billy (be) _____

playing at the park.

19) The students (be) _____

studying English.

20) The test (be) _____ hard!

21) My best friend (be) _____

coming to my house.

Example: I (be) am happy.

1) I (be) _____ tired.

2) I (be) _____ hungry.

3) I (be) _____ late!

Example: You / We / They (be) are happy.

7) You (be) _____ nice.

8) We (be) _____ sleepy.

9) They (be) _____ funny.

Example: He / She / It (be) is happy.

4) He (be) _____ cool.

5) She (be) _____ pretty.

6) It (be) _____ fast.

Now we’ll use nouns instead ofpronouns…

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Name ________________ Date ________________


Choose the correct form of "to be" in p pr r eesseennt t t t eennssee.

Example: I (be) am excited.

Example: Jessica and Akbar (be) are happy.

Example: The new car (be) is nice.

11)) The bag (be) ________ blue.

A. am

B. are C. is

22)) The rocks (be) ________ hard.

A. am

B. are C. is

33)) The children (be) ________ young.

A. am

B. are

C. is

44)) Thomas (be) ________ nice.

A. am

B. are

C. is

55)) The game (be) ________ difficult.

A. am

B. are

C. is

66)) They (be) ________ tired.

A. am

B. are

C. is

77)) I (be) ________ thirty years old.

A. am

B. are

C. is

88)) Susan and Juan (be) ________married.

A. am

B. are

C. is

99)) Teddy (be) ________ my friend.

A. am

B. are

C. is

1100)) We (be) ________ in Englishclass.

A. am

B. are

C. is

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Name ________________ Date ________________


Write the correct form of the verb "to be" in p pr r eesseennt t t t eennssee.

Note: The verb can be positive (+) or negative (-). Use not to form the negative.\

Example: My teacher (be) is nice. (+)

Example: The cat (be, not) is not hungry. (-)

11)) The old man (be) ________ wise. 22)) The sun (be) ________ hot.

33)) The children (be) ________ eatingbananas. They (be, not) ____ ____eating apples.

44)) I (be) ________ happy. I (be, not) ____ ____ sad.

55)) The racecar (be) ________ fast. It(be, not) ____ ____ slow.

66)) My friend (be) ________ buying anew car. Her old car broke down. Itdoesn't work anymore.

77)) I (be) ________ at the beach withmy family. It (be) ________ hot andsunny outside. The ocean water(be) ________ warm.

88)) Ko and Jacob (be) ________ verysmart. Ko (be) ________ a scientistand Jacob (be) ________ anengineer.

99)) The library (be) ________ openuntil 9:00 p.m.

1100)) The school (be) ________ small. It(be, not) ____ ____ big.

1111)) The books (be) ________ new.They (be, not) ____ ____ old.

1122)) Tommy, Steven, and Teddy (be) ________ acting in the school play.

1133)) Beatrice (be) ________ at herhouse.

1144)) It (be) ________ hot outside. It(be, not) ____ ____ cold outside.

1155)) You (be) ________ finished withthe quiz!

1166)) Judith (be, not) ____ ____ athome. She (be) ________ school.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Name ________________ Date ________________


Write the correct form of "to be" in p pr r eesseennt t t t eennssee.

My name (be) ________ (1) John. I (be) ________ (2) fifteen years old. I live

on a farm. It (be) ________ (3) in the country. It is quiet in the country. It (be, not)

____ ____ (4) loud in the country.

I wake up early. Sometimes, I wake up before the sun rises. Sometimes, it

(be) ________ (5) still dark when I wake up. But I don’t mind. I like waking up that

early. I like the way the country looks in the morning.

The first thing I do after I wake up is milk the cow. After I (be) ________ (6)

finished milking the cow, I bring the milk to my mom. I think she uses it to make

breakfast. She makes a delicious breakfast. My mom

(be) ________ (7) a really good cook.

Next, I feed the pigs. One time, I asked my mom how come my little sister

doesn’t feed them. She said it is because my sister (be, not) ____ ____ (8) strong

enough. But I still don’t understand. She is almost as strong as me! I guess my

mom doesn’t want my sister to get hurt. After all, the pigs can (be) ________ (9)

pretty rough, especially when they (be) ________ (10) hungry.

The last thing I do (be) ________ (11) feed the chickens. That (be)

________ (12) easy. I just throw some food down on the ground and they run out

and eat it. While the chickens (be) ________ (13) eating, I go into their house to

collect their eggs. Chicken eggs (be) ________ (14) really good to eat. They (be)

________ (15) easy to cook too. That is what I do in the mornings. I (be)

________ (16) pretty busy.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Name ________________ Date ________________

EExxeer r cciissee 55

Using the Verb "To be" Write the correct form of "to be" in p pr r eesseennt t t t eennssee.

Tess and Jen ________ (1) best friends.

They do everything together. They spend every day together.

One day they meet on the bus to school. They start talking.

“Hey Jen,” says Tess. “How ________ (2) you?”

“Hey girl,” says Jen. “I ________ (3) doing fine. What ________ (4) going on? What ________ (5) you doing today?”

“Oh,” says Tess, “I ____ _ _____ (6) doing anything special. I don’t have anyplans.”

“That ________ (7) cool.”

“Yeah,” says Tess. “But I have something to tell you.”

“Really! Can I try to guess?”

“Umm…” says Tess. “Well…”

“Okay, I get three guesses. Ready?”

“Umm, well…okay.”

“ ________ (8) we eating dinner together?”

“No, that ____ _ _____ (9) it.”

“Okay. Are we going to the soccer game together?”

“No. It ____ ____ (10) that either.” Tess looks ner vous. Her eyes look sad. A tearstarts to fall down her cheek.

“Oh,” says Jen, wiping a tear from her own eye. “Now I know. You ________ (11)

moving away.”

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


●●●●●●R R eeaad d T T hheeoor r y y ..OOr r g g © © 2 2 0 0 110 0

EEnngglliisshhFFoor r EEvveer r yyoonnee..OOr r gg © © 2 2 0 0 0 0 8 8

Name ________________ Date ________________


Choose the correct form of "to be" in p paasst t t t eennssee.

Example: You / We / They (be) were sick yesterday.

Example: I / He / She / It (be) was sick yesterday.

11)) I (be) ________ tired yesterday.

A. was B. were

22)) You (be) ________ happyyesterday.

A. was

B. were

33)) We (be) ________ sad yesterday.

A. wasB. were

44)) They (be) ________ busyyesterday.

A. wasB. were

55)) He (be) ________ angry yesterday.

A. wasB. were

66)) She (be) ________ sleepy

yesterday.

A. wasB. were

77)) It (be) ________ cold yesterday.

A. wasB. were

Practice writing sentences using the verb “to be” in past tense.

11)) ______________________________________________________________

22)) ______________________________________________________________

33)) ______________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Name ________________ Date ________________



Example: You / We / They (be) were sick last night.

Example: I / He / She / It (be) was sick last night.

11)) I (be) ________ tired last night.

A. was B. were

22)) You (be) ________ happy lastnight.

A. was

B. were

33)) Richard and I (be) ________excited last night.

A. wasB. were

44)) Javier and Roberto (be) ________lazy last night.

A. wasB. were

55)) Julian (be) ________ angry

yesterday.

A. wasB. were

66)) Rachel (be) ________ sleepy

yesterday.

A. wasB. were

77)) The movie (be) ________ scary. Idon't want to watch it again.

A. wasB. were

88)) Ko, Teddy, and Peter (be) ________ tired after the long drive.

A. wasB. were

99)) Jonathan (be) ________ hungry.So, he ate a sandwich.

A. wasB. were

1100)) My mom (be) ________ helpingthe teacher at school yesterday.

A. wasB. were

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Name ________________ Date ________________



Example: My dog (be) was sick last night. (positive)

Example: Carlos (be, not) was not at work yesterday. (negative)

11)) The party (be) ________ fun lastweekend.

22)) They (be) ________ watching amovie when Ernesto called. They(be, not) ____ ____ watching TV.

33)) Jessie (be) ________ tired. So, hewent to sleep.

44)) When she was a little girl, Margo(be) ________ very good at tennis.She practiced every day.

55)) My friends and I (be) ________studying English last night.

66)) Kendra (be) ________ in my sixthgrade English class. We (be)

________ good friends before shemoved away.

77)) The movie (be) ________ reallyboring. It (be, not) ____ ____entertaining. We stopped watchingit before it was over.

88)) After playing outside, my dog (be) ________ very dirty. She came intothe house and ran into my room. It(be) ________ such a mess!

99)) I (be, not) ____ ____ eating asandwich when you called. I (be)

________ eating a salad.

1100)) The students (be, not) ____ ____ready to take the test. Theyneeded to study more.

Practice writing sentences using the verb “to be” in past tense.

11)) ______________________________________________________________

22)) ______________________________________________________________

33)) ______________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Name ________________ Date ________________


Using the Verb "To be" Write the correct form of "to be" in p paasst t t t eennssee.

Example: My dog (be) was sick last night. (positive)

Example: Carlos (be, not) was not at work yesterday. (negative)

11)) Teddy (be) ________ driving homewhen I saw him.

22)) Mack, Jenny, and Javier (be) ________ walking their dog when Italked to them last Saturday.

33)) Who (be) ________ sleeping in mybed? It (be, not) ____ ____ James.It (be, not) ____ ____ Julio. Oh, Iknow! It (be) ________ Roger!

44)) I (be) ________ going to thegrocery store when you called.

55)) At 7:00 we (be) ________ eatingdinner and watching T.V.

66)) When he was a kid, Ivan (be, not) ____ ____ very social. He did not

spend time with his friends. Hespent a lot of time alone. He (be)

________ always reading a book orlistening to music in his room.

77)) When I (be) ________ in the ninthgrade, I (be) ________ five feet tall.

88)) Lola (be) ________ a very nice girl.She helped her parents, did herhomework, and even took care ofher little brother. It is a shame shehad to move away.

99)) The cat (be) ________ faster thanthe mouse. So, the cat caught themouse. Unlucky mouse!

1100)) The weather (be) ________ hot.We (be) ________ sweating. Iasked my mom to roll the windowdown.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




Name ________________ Date ________________


Using the Verb "To be" Choose the correct form of "to be" in present tense or past tense.

Example: My dog (be) is sick today. (present tense)

Example: My dog (be) was sick last night. (past tense)

11)) The clouds moved away, and the sun shone through. The sky was full ofpretty colors. It (be) ________ beautiful.

22)) Arturo and Ryo (be) ________ at the party last night.

33)) (be) ________ Taylor going to the pool later?

44)) The old house (be) ________ built in 1967.

55)) Christopher, where (be) ________ you last night? I (be) ________ looking allover for you.

66)) Yesterday (be) ________ the best day of my life!

77)) I (be) ________ ready to go. When (be) ________ we leaving?

88)) Who (be) ________ at the pool yesterday?

99)) I (be) ________ very tired. I (be) ________ tired yesterday too. I think I(be) ________ getting sick.

1100)) I (be) ________ driving to the office this morning when I noticed that I wasgetting low on gas. So, I stopped to get more. A kind man filled the tank forme. He (be) ________ very nice.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




Name ________________ Date ________________


Write the correct form of "to be" in present tense or past tense.

Example: My dog (be) is sick. (present tense)

Example: My dog (be) was sick last night. (past tense)

11)) Sarah (be) ________ at the partylast night. Li-Ning and Akmoud (be)

________ there too.

22)) Avery (be) ________ my bestfriend. She and I (be) ________ inthe same English class. It meetsfrom 10:00 to 10:50.

33)) Mallika and I (be) ________ atJenny's house yesterday. Now, we(be) ________ at Mellissa's house.

44)) Johan and I (be) ________ in themountains. We (be) ________ on acamping trip together. I hope wedon't see a bear!

55)) When she (be) ________ young,Nisha (be) ________ interested inscience. However, she (be, not)

_____ _____ interested in science

anymore. Now, she (be) ________interested in math.

66)) Tennis (be) ________ my favoritesport when I was in high school.Now my favorite sport (be)

________ soccer.

77)) My family and I (to be) ________swimming in the pool when it beganto thunder. The lifeguard told us wehad to get out. I (be) ________upset, but I knew he was right.

88)) Lenny (be) ________ at the footballgame last night. He (be) ________cheering for his favorite team. After thegame, he came back home and went tosleep. I think he (be) ________ stillsleeping now. Shhhh... don't wake himup!

99)) It rained all day yesterday. I (be) ________ sad because I could notgo outside. However, today it (be)

________ sunny. And I(be) ________ happy because I cango outside!

1100)) Before, Yoko and Kobi (be) ________ enemies. Now they (be) ________ best friends.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




Name ________________ Date ________________


Write the correct form of "to be" in present tense or past tense.

“I ________ (1) going outside,” said Jerry.

“Wait!” said Jerry’s mom.Don’t forget to wear your jacket.It ________ (2) cold out there.

“But mom,” said Jerry. “I don’t want to wear it.I will be fine without it.Besides, it _____ _____ (3) that cold today.”

Jerry opened the door. The wind ________ (4) blowing and the trees ________ (5)

shaking. Leaves ________ (6) falling to the ground. He shivered a little and stoodbehind the door.

“Jerry!” shouted Jerry’s mom. “You close that door and get your coat young man.”

“But mom!” said Jerry.

“But what?” said Jerry’s mom. “I don’t understand why you don’t want to wearyour new coat. ________ (7) there something wrong with it?

Jerry’s face turned red. “No!” he said. “Nothing’s wrong with it!” Then he coveredhis mouth with his hand.

“Well then…” said Jerry’s mom. “Why don’t you want to wear it?”

“Well, mom,” said Jerry. “I kind of…well…gave it away.”

“You what?” said Jerry’s mom. “You gave it away?”

“Yeah. But don’t worry. It ________ (8) okay. I gave it to Marvin. And he reallyneeds it.”

“Why?”

“Well, every time I see him, he looks cold. He ________ (9) always cold, actually.His parents cannot afford to buy him a jacket.”

“Well, that ________ (10) a very nice thing for you to do, dear. But nowwhat________ (11) you going to do without a jacket?”

“I don’t know. Maybe I’ll wear my old jacket for a little while.”

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




Name ________________ Date ________________


Present Tense Choose the correct form of the verb in simple present tense.

Example: I / You / We / They (cook) cook.

Example: He / She / It (cook) cooks.

1) I ( cook / cooks ) on Monday.

2) You ( cook / cooks ) on Tuesday.

3) We ( cook / cooks ) on Wednesday.

4) They ( cook / cooks ) on Thursday.

5) He ( cook / cooks ) on Friday.

6) She ( cook / cooks ) on Saturday.

7) It ( cook / cooks ) on Sunday.

EExxeer r cciissee 22 Present Tense

Choose the correct form of the verb in simple present tense.

Example: I / You / We / They (wash) wash the car on Monday.

Example: He / She / It (wash) washes the car on Tuesday.

1) I ( wash / washes ) the car on Monday.

2) You ( wash / washes ) the car on Tuesday.

3) We ( wash / washes ) the car on Wednesday.

4) They ( wash / washes ) the car on Thursday.5) He ( wash / washes ) the car on Friday.

6) She ( wash / washes ) the car on Saturday.

7) It ( wash / washes ) the car on Sunday.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




Name ________________ Date ________________



Example: I / You / We / They (study) study English on Monday.

Example: He / She / It (study) studies English on Tuesday.

1) I (study / studies) English on Monday.

2) You (study / studies) English on Tuesday.

3) We (study / studies) English on Wednesday.

4) They (study / studies) English on Thursday.

5) He (study / studies) English on Friday.

6) She (study / studies) English on Saturday.

7) It (study / studies) English on Sunday.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




Name ________________ Date ________________

EExxeer r cciissee 44Present Tense

Choose the correct form of the verb in simple present tense. Use what you havelearned in exercises 1, 2, and 3.

Example: I / You / We / They (cook) cook.

Example: He / She / It (cook) cooks.

Example: I / You / We / They (wash) wash the car on Monday.

Example: He / She / It (wash) washes the car on Tuesday.

Example: I / You / We / They (study) study English on Monday.

Example: He / She / It (study) studies English on Tuesday.

1) They (study / studies) English on Tuesday.

2) He (cook / cooks) on Tuesday.

3) I (wash / washes) the car on Wednesday.

4) We (cook / cooks) on Sunday.

5) You (wash / washes) the car on Friday.

6) She (wash / washes) the car on Saturday.

7) We (study / studies) English on Sunday.

8) It (cook / cooks) on Thursday.

9) He (study / studies) English on Friday.

10)You (wash / washes) the car on Thursday.

11)They (cook / cooks) on Wednesday.

12)She (study /studies) English on Thursday.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




Name ________________ Date ________________



Note: In this exercise, nouns (Tom, Amy, Daniel, etc.) are used in place of pronouns ( I / You / We / They / He / She / It ). So, it is a good idea to think about which pronoun you could use instead ofeach noun. After you know what pronoun replaces the noun, use what you have learned inexercises 1, 2, 3, and 4 to conjugate the verbs correctly.

Example: Tom and I → We (cook) cook on Tuesday.

Example: Tom and Amy → They (cook) cook on Tuesday

Example: Tom → He (cook) cooks on Tuesday

Example: Amy → She (cook) cooks on Tuesday

1) Tom and Amy (cook / cooks) on Wednesday.

2) Daniel and I (cook / cooks) on Tuesday.

3) Herbert (cook / cooks) on Sunday.

4) Carlos and Peter (wash / washes) the car on Friday.

5) Jovita (wash / washes) the car on Saturday.

6) Ko, Uri, and I (study / studies) English on Monday.

7) The students (study / studies) English on Thursday.

8) Randy (study / studies) English on Friday.

9) I (wash / washes) the car on Thursday.

10) Mack (wash / washes) the car on Monday.

11) Natasha (study / studies) English on Thursday.

12) Rachel: Hi, Nina. Can I help you?

Nina: Yes. You (wash / washes) the car, and I will cook dinner.

Rachel: Okay. Good plan!

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




Name ________________ Date ________________



1) Monica (eat) _______ eggs.

2) Teddy and Monica (eat) _______ eggs.

3) Mickie (study) _______ English every day.

4) Arthur and Jason (study) _______ English on Monday and Tuesday.

5) Angie and I (drink) _______ coffee.

6) Eva (like) _______ chocolate.7) Dustin (watch) _______ movies.

8) Yoko (play) _______ the piano.

9) The students (take) _______ tests.

10)It (rain) _______ here a lot.

EE

xx

ee

r r cc

iiss

ee

77

Present Tense


1) Dennis (cook) _______ on Wednesday.

2) Mariella and I (cook) _______ on Tuesday.

3) Spencer (wash) _______ his car on Sunday.

4) Tammy and I (wash) _______ our car on Monday.

5) You (study) _______ science on Thursday.

6) Thomas (study) _______ math on Friday.

7) Rickie (play) _______ golf and tennis.

8) Justin and I (play) _______ basketball and soccer.

9) Kim (read) _______ fiction novels.

10) Richard and David (read) _______ the newspaper.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




Name ________________ Date ________________



Example: I / You / We / They (play) play the guitar.

Example: He / She / It (play) plays the guitar.

1) I ( bake / bakes ) cakes.

2) You ( work / works ) in an office.

3) We ( take / takes ) pictures of birds.

4) They ( talk / talks ) about cars.

5) He ( think / thinks ) about school.

6) She ( play / plays ) soccer.

7) It ( rain / rains ) here a lot.

8) I ( like / likes ) chocolate.

9) He ( like / likes ) chocolate.

10) You ( watch / watches ) movies.

11) She ( watch / watches ) movies.

12) The babies ( cry / cries ) every night.

13) The baby (cry / cries) every night.

14) I ( fly / flies ) to Belize every year.

15) My father ( fly / flies ) to Belize every year.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Name ________________ Date ________________


Present TenseFill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in simple present tense.

Example: I (play) play the guitar.

Example: Jessica (play) plays the guitar.

1) I (be) _______ sixteen years old.

2) Tommy (live) _______ at 107 Pine Lane.

3) Juana (cook) _______ dinner for her family.

4) They (eat) _______ lunch at 12:00.

5) Nina (take) _______ medicine when she is sick.

6) I (like) _______ chocolate.

7) He (drive) _______ a nice car.

8) We (want) _______ to see a movie tonight.

9) Mr. Anderson (teach) _______ chemistry at Hill High School.

10) They (study) _______ English at school.

11) I (want) _______ to go home now.

12) Bill and Calicia (drive) _______ to the mountains every year. every year.

13) We (eat) _______ pasta once a week.

14) It (snow) _______ here in December.

15) When Dax (take) _______ a shower, he (wash) _______ his hair with shampoo.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Name ________________ Date ________________


Fill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in simple present tense.

Example: I/You/We/They (play) play the guitar.

Example: He/She/It (play) plays the guitar.

1) Mary (be) _______ twenty-nine years old.

2) We (like) _______ to eat fruit. It (taste) _______ good.

3) The football team never (score) _______ . It (lose) _______ all the time.

4) Roberta and Betty always (talk) _______ to each

other on the phone.

5) Jose and I (study) _______ chemistry together.

6) The car (have) _______ a flat tire.

7)

You never (make) _______ breakfast for me. I

always (have) _______ to make it myself.

8) The mechanic (fix) _______ my car when it breaks down.

9) Tom rarely (fly) _______. He usually (drive) _______.

10) I usually (watch) _______ TV, but tonight I (think) _______ I will read a book.

11) Igor (call) _______ his mother on the phone every day.

12) When he (be) _______ alone at night, Beto sometimes (get) _______ scared.

13) I (be) _______ tired. I (think) _______ I am going to take a nap.

14) Cakes (be) _______ hard to make. They (require) _______ a lot of work.

15) Joel (like) _______ to play soccer. He (practice) _______ every day.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




Name ________________ Date ________________


Present Tense Fill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in simple present tense.

Affirmative (+):

Example: He (play) plays the guitar.

Negative (-):

He (not, play) does not play the guitar.

1) I rarely (eat) _______ chocolate. I (not, like) _______ ______ _______the way it

(taste) _______.

2) We (like) _______ to watch movies. My favorite movie (be) _______ Titanic.

3) The ocean (sound) _______ like an airplane.

4) The flag (blow) _______ in the wind every day. It is getting old. It (need)

_______ to be replaced soon.

5) The janitor at my school (empty) _______ the

trash on Sunday.

6) Angelica always (try) _______ to make new

friends.

7) James (run) _______ two miles every day.

8) Elizabeth often (march) _______ with the band.

9) John and I (open) _______ presents at Christmas.

10) When there is a fire, the firemen (rush) _______ to put it out. After the fire(be)_______ out, they (go) _______ home.

11) I (be, not) _______ _______ tired. I (think) _______ I will read a book.

12) Shelley (not, think) _______ _______ _______ this quiz is hard. But I (do)

_______!

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Name ________________ Date ________________


Present TenseFill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in simple present tense.

Example: I (play) play the guitar.

Example: Jessica (play) plays the guitar.

Example: He (not, play) does not play the guitar.

1) I always (eat) _______ vegetables. Carrots (be) _______ my favorite.

2) Randy (like) _______ swimming in the ocean, but he (be) _______ afraidof sharks.

3) It (be) _______ really cold outside, and I (not, have) _______ _______ _______

a jacket!

4) We (think ) _______ it is fun to ride roller coasters.

5) Roberto and Kelly (hunt) ______ for eggs every Easter.

6) The simple present tense (be) _______ easy!

7) My family (want) _______ to visit the pyramids in Egypt.

8) Donna (love) _______ the summer. She also (like)

_______ winter.

9) Liz and Tommy (travel) _______ to the coast every year.

10) The baby (cry) _______ every time it (want) _______ to be fed.

11) You (need) _______ to exercise in order to stay healthy.

12) What time (be) _______ Rubiela getting here? She (be) _______ late!

13) Yoko (win) _______ the science contest every year. She (be) _______

so smart!

14) Ken (be) _______ a baker. He (bake) _______ cakes and pastries every morning.

Then he (sell) _______ them to his customers. Everybody (love) _______ Ken's

bakery.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Name ________________ Date ________________



Note: These sentences use verbs and adverbs. An adverb says something more about theaction of a verb.

Example: Joseph (always, climb) always climbs trees in his yard.

Example: Ernestine (usually, pick) usually picks flowers on Mondays.

1) Julia (sometimes, sell) _______ _______ lemonade on hot

days.

2) Thomas (often, play) _______ _______ baseball after

school.

3) My neighbor (never, paint) _______ _______ his house; it

looks terrible!

4) The students (eagerly, leave) _______ _______ their

classrooms when the bell rings.

5) Mrs. Gomez (quickly, water) _______ _______ the plants

when she (get) _______ home at five o'clock.

6) Each night, Serena (kindly, help) _______ _______her little

sister with geography homework.

7) Stuart (happily, play) _______ _______video games with his

friends on Saturdays.

8) Joan and Nate (patiently, wait) _______ _______ for the bus to arrive each day.

9) The jazz musicians in our town (frequently, win) _______ _______ competitions.

10) The merry-go-round (slowly, come) _______ _______ to a stop every five

minutes.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Name ________________ Date ________________

EExxeer r cciissee 1144Simple Present Tense Review


Hi. My name (be) _______ (1) Albert. My friends (call) _______ (2) me Al. You cancall

me Al if you (like) _______ (3) .

I (want) to tell you about a problem I (have) _______ (4) .It (be, not) ______ ______ (5)

a big problem, but it is not a small problem, either. I (guess) _______ (6) it's somewhere

between big and small.

I (have) _______ (7) a best friend. His name (be) _______ (8) Joe,

but everybody (call) _______ (9) him Joey. Joey and I have been friends for a long time.

That's the problem. Joey (like) _______ (10) to smoke. He (say) _______ (11)

he (do, not) _______ ______ (12) but I (know) _______ (13) he (do) _______ (14)

.He (try) _______ (15) to hide it from me, but I (see) _______ (16) him do it

sometimes. When I see him do it, he just (laugh) _______ (17) and (walk) _______ (18)

away.

Now, Joey (smoke) _______ (19) every day. When he (come) _______ (20) over to my

house, he (always, bring) _______ _______ (21) his cigarettes with him. He (keep)

_______ (22) them in his pocket. He (think) _______ (23) they are cool. He (not, think)

_______ _______ _______ (24) it's a bad idea to smoke. He (say) _______ (25) "(not,

worry) _______ _______ _______ (26) Al. I'm okay." He (tell) _______ (27) me that I (not,

understand) _______ _______ _______ (28) ,but I (think) _______ (29) I (do) _______ (30) .

I (feel) _______ (31) like it's his right to smoke. He can do what he (want) _______ (32)

to do, right? But I can (not, help) _______ _______ (33) worrying. He's my best friend.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Name ________________ Date ________________


Fill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in present progressive tense.

Example: I (play) am playing the piano now.

Example: You / We / they (play) are playing the piano now.

Example: He / She / It (play) _______ _______ the piano now.

1) I (play) _______ _______ the piano now.

2) You (play) _______ _______ the guitar now.

3) We (play) _______ _______ violins now.

4) They (play) _______ _______ harps now.

5) He (play) _______ _______ the trumpet now.

6) She (play) _______ _______ the flute now.

7) It (play) ________ _______ the drums now.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Name ________________ Date ________________



Note: Sometimes you must double the last letter in the word before you add "ing". The rule for doublingis: when a one-syllable verb ends with consonant-vowel-consonant, the final consonant is doubled. If theverb is longer than one syllable, the final consonant is doubled only if the stress falls on the last syllable.Exceptions: never double the letters h,w,x,y.

Example: I (run) am running now.

Example: You / We / They (run) are running now.

Example: He / She / It (run) is running now.

Example: I (talk) am talking now.

Example: You / We / They (talk) are talking now.

Example: He / She / It (talk) is talking now.

1) I (run) _________ _________ now.

2) I (talk) _________ _________ now.

3) You (get) __________ _________ hungry now.

4) You (eat) _________ _________ now.

5) We (plan) _________ _________ the vacation now.

6) They (play) _________ _________ the game now.

7) They (stop) _________ _________ the game now.

8) He (swim) _________ __________ in the pool now.

9) He (sleep) _________ _________ in the bed now.

10) She (shop) _________ _________ at the mall now.

11) She (eat) _________ _________ with her friends now.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




Name ________________ Date ________________



Note: In this exercise, nouns (Tom, Amy, Daniel, etc.) are used in place of pronouns (I /You / We / They / He / She / It). So, it is a good idea to think about which pronoun youcould use instead of each noun. After you know what pronoun replaces the noun, usewhat you have learned in exercises 15 and 16 to conjugate the verbs correctly.

Example: I (listen) am listening to music now.

Example: You / We /they (listen) are listening to music now.

Example: He / She / It (listen) is listening to music now.

1) Jason (listen) ________ ________ to music now.

2) I (talk) ________ ________ now.

3) Erin and Jessica (make) ________ ________ a cake right now.

4) Shhh…be quiet! The teacher (speak) ________ ________ now!

5) Marcos and I (study) ________ ________ English now.

6) Are Daniel and James playing football this year? No, they ________

________ soccer.

7) Emily (eat) _________ ________ breakfast now.

8) My car (make) ________ ________ strange noises. I need to get it checked

out.

9) Mr. Cooper: Hello. May I speak to Andrew?

Bob: No, he (sleep) _______ ________ right now. May I take a message?

10) Jennifer: Is Rosa coming to the park with us?

Yoko: No, she (work) ________ ________ today.

Jennifer: Oh, poor girl!

http://www.englishmaven.org/HP6/Present%20Tense%20Exercise%2014.htm




7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Name ________________ Date ________________



Example: I (buy) am buying groceries now.

Example: You / We / They / (buy) are buying groceries now.

Example: He / She / It (buy) is buying groceries now.

1) Right now, I (buy) ________ ________ groceries. I need eggs, milk, and bread.

2) We (eat) ________ ________ dinner. It tastes good.

Can you pass me the salt, please?

3) He (drink) ________ ________ milk. It looks good. It (run)

________ ________ down his chin. He needs a napkin.

4) Billy (do) ________ ________ his homework now. We are going to watch a movie

when he is finished.

5) All of the children (dance) ________ ________ at the party. They (smile) ________

________. They (have) ________ ________ a good time.

6) Jenny (take) ________ _________ pictures of Roman Cathedrals.

7) My car (move) ________ ________ down the hill. I forgot to engage the parking

break. Somebody please help me!

8) Andrea and Alejandro (take) ________ ________ a walk. The fresh air feels

great.

9) Dr. Mason is busy. He (see) ________ ________ a patient right now. He will see

you in twenty minutes.

10) Mr. Henderson and I (talk) ________ ________ on the phone. He (tell) ________

________ me about his children. They seem nice.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Name ________________ Date ________________



Example: I (listen) am listening to music now.

Example: You / We / They (study) are studying English now.

Example: He / She / It (take) is taking a shower now.

1) Amy and Alison (take) ________ ________ the dog for a walk. Gabriella (comb)

________ ________ her hair. I (brush) ________ ________ my teeth.

2) Tommy and Brian (listen) _______ ________ to music. It sounds like rock music.

3) Right now, Mr. Andrews (drive) ________

________ the bus. The bus (move) ________ ________

slowly. I don't mind, though. I am not in a hurry.

4) The band (play) ________ ________ a song.

5) Right now, my sister (compete) ________ ________ in a

tennis match. I think she (lose) ________ ________. She does not look very happy.

6) We (work) ________ ________ in the office until 5:00 today.

7) Be careful! Megan (cook) ________ ________, and the oven is hot.

8) Rachel and her friend (come) ________ ________ to dinner tonight. They (get)

________ ________ ready now. They should be here in twenty minutes.

9) Right now, the machines (make) ________ ________ car parts. They will be

finished in two hours.

10) The outdoorsmen (climb) ________ _______ Mt. Denali this year. I hope they

make it to the top!

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Name ________________ Date ________________


Present TenseFill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in present progressive tense.

Example: I (watch) am watching a movie now.

Example: You / We / They (play) are playing a game now.

Example: He / She / It (eating) is eating a hamburger now.

1) Amelia and Abjar (move) ________ ________ to California this week.

2) The bright lights (flash) ________ ________. They (hurt) ________ ________

my eyes.

3) Right now, you (type) ________ ________ on the computer.

4) The groundskeeper (mow) ________ ________ the grass.

5) The computer (process) ________ ________ a command.

6) Aunt Janet (paint) ________ ________ a picture. She is

almost finished.

7) My dog (jump) ________ ________ and wagging its tail. It must be excited.

8) The rain (fall) ________ ________ very fast now. I think a big storm (come)

_________ ________ this way. We had better get prepared.

9) The old man (smoke) ________ ________ his pipe. He (think) ________

_________ about his grandchildren.

10) Elijah (run) ________ ________ in a race. He (try) ________ ________ to win. I

think he can.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Name ________________ Date ________________



Affirmative (+):

Example: I (read) am reading a book now.

Example: You / We / They (speak) are speaking English now.

Example: He / She / It (run) is running in a race today.

Negative (-):

Example: I (not, drive) am not driving to work today. I am walking.

Example: Marlene and Joseph (not, come) are not coming with me to the movie.

Example: Pedro (not, cook) is not cooking dinner tonight.

1) Dennis (hike) ________ ________ up the mountain right now. He is almost at the

top. I bet he (get) ________ ________ pretty tired.

2) I (tell) ________ _________ a bedtime story to my children, but I don't think they

(listen) ________ ________. Their eyes are closed. I think they (sleep) ________

________.3) The comedian (act) ________ ________ funny. The audience (laugh) ________

_________ at his jokes.

4) It (get) ________ _________ cold outside and my son (camp) ________

_________ high up in the mountains. I hope he (not, freeze)

________ ________ _________ up there!

5) Eddie (not, write) ________ ________ ________ a novel. He

(write) ________ ________ a poem.

6) Uncle Terry and his friend (fish) ________ ________ at the lake today. They

(not, fish) ________ ________ _________ at the beach.

7) Beto (sing) ________ ________ in the shower. He has a nice voice!

8) You (meet) ________ ________ the President tonight. He (expect) ________

_________ you to talk about the new proposal. Are you ready?

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


\\●●●●●●R R eeaad d T T hheeoor r y y ..OOr r g g © © 2 2 0 0 110 0 EEnngglliisshhFFoor r EEvveer r yyoonnee..OOr r gg © © 2 2 0 0 0 0 8 8

Name ________________ Date ________________



Note: These sentences use verbs and adverbs. An adverb says something more about the

action of a verb.

Example: Violet (gracefully, dance) is gracefully dancing a ballet.

Example: Raul (wisely, check) is wisely checking the oil in his car.

1) The breeze (softly, blow) _______ _______ _______ on our faces.

2) The dog is very hungry. He is (quickly, eat) ________ ________ ________ all

of his food.

3) The chestnut racehorse (already, cross) ________ ________ ________ the

finish line. Its owner is very happy.

4) Jonathan (rarely, exercise) ________ ________ ________, now that he is in

college.

5) Mrs. Stevens (angrily, yell) ________ ________ ________at the man who hit

her car.

6) Be careful! You (almost, spill) ________ ________ ________ the

paint.

7) The police (abruptly, stop) ________ ________ ________ traffic

at the intersection.

8) Chad (nervously, ask) ________ ________ ________ Tina for a

date.

9) Dr. Wong (calmly, explain) ________ ________ ________ theoperation to the patient's family.

10) The little girl (shyly, talk) ________ ________ ________ to Santa Claus. She

wants him to bring her a puppy!

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Name ________________ Date ________________


Review of the Present Progressive TenseFill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in present progressive tense.

Hey! Do you want to hear about what my family (do) ________ ________ (1) right

now? Well, I hope you do, because I am going to tell you!

Right now, my dad (work) ________ _________ (2) outside. I can see him. He (mow)

________ _________ (3) the grass. He loves my mother very much. He (always, talk)

_______ ________ ________ (4) about her. He (always, do) _______ ________

_________ (5) nice things for her. Right now, my dad (sing) _______ _________ (6) a

song. I bet it is a song about my mom.

Now, let's look at my mom. She (cook) _______ ________ (7) something in the

kitchen. It smells so good! She (put) _______ ________ (8) some kind of spices into the

pot. The pot (sit) _______ ________ (9) on the stove. The water (boil) _______ )

________ (10) inside it. Also, something (bake) _______ ________ (11) in the oven. It

(start) _______ ________ (12) to turn brown. I think it is a turkey.

I also have two younger brothers. Right now they (play) _______ ________ (13) with

their toys on the floor beside me. They (laugh) _______ ________ (14) with one another.

They (make) _______ ________ (15) a house out of blocks. The house (get) _______

________ (16) taller and taller. Oh no! The house is too tall. Watch out! It (crash)

_______ ________ (17) to the floor!

We are a happy family. I feel lucky to be a part of my family. Hmmm…let me

guess…you (think) _______ ________ (18) about your own family now, aren't you?

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




Name ________________ Date ________________


Fill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in simple present tense orpresent progressive tense.

Example: I (watch) watch a lot of movies. [simple present tense]

Example: I (watch) am watching a movie now. [present progressive tense]

Example: You / We / They (play) play games every day. [simple present tense]

Example: You / We / they (play) are playing a game now. [present progressive tense]

Example: He / She / It (eat) eats eggs for breakfast. [simple present tense]

Example: He / She / It (eat) is eating an egg now. [present progressive tense]

1) Right now I (watch) _______ _______ a movie. I (watch) _______ a lot of

movies.

2) Rickie (be) _______ my friend. We (like) _______ to talk together. Right now we

(talk) _______ _______ about school.

3) The police officer (wear) ________ a badge and a gun to work

every day.

4) Jaime usually (eat) _______ cold cereal for breakfast, but todayhe (eat) _______ ________ oatmeal instead.

5) Alison and I (study) _______ _______ for the exam. We (not, want) _______

_______ _______ to fail it!

6) Jonas (sing) ________ in the band on Saturdays, and Veda (play) _______

the guitar.

7) My uncle (live) _______ in Tennessee. I (live) _______ in North Carolina.

8) My mom (cook) _______ _______ dinner tonight. (You, want) _______ _______

_______ to eat with us?

9) Tiffany and Mark (travel) _______ _______ to Spain. They will stay in Madrid.

10) We (read) _______ the newspaper every morning.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




Name ________________ Date ________________


Present TenseFill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in simple present tense or

present progressive tense.

Example: I (watch) watch a lot of movies. [simple present tense]

Example: I (watch) am watching a movie now. [present progressive tense]

Example: You / We / They (play) play games every day. [simple present tense]

Example: You / We / They (play) are playing a game now. [present progressive tense]

Example: He / She /It (eat) eats eggs for breakfast. [simple present tense]

Example: He / She / It (eat) is eating an egg now. [present progressive tense]

1) Jessie (ride) ________ his bike every day. In fact, he (ride) ________ ________ his

bike right now.

2) Arnold and Peter (take) ________ ________ a test now. They (take) ________ a lot

of tests.

3) I (want) ________ some new shoes. The pair I (have) ________ now (get)

________ ________ old.

4) Tony (be) ________ my friend. We (spend) ________ a lot of time together.

5) What (be) ________ your name? Where (be) ________ you from? Where (do)

_______ you live?

6) I (no, watch) _______ _______ _________ TV now. I (talk) _______ _________

on the phone. I (like) ________ to talk on the phone.

7) Andrea (like) ________ to cook. Right now, she (make) _______ _________

vegetable soup.

8) When (do) _______ the bus leave? I hope we (be) _______ not too late!

9) I (be) _______ so thirsty! (you, have) _______ _______ ________ anything to

drink?

10) Thomas (read) _______ ________ the newspaper and (drink) _________ coffee in

the living room. He (no, do) _______ ________ have to go to work today.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Name ________________ Date ________________


Review of the Simple Present and Present Progressive Tenses.Fill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in simple present tense or present

progressive tense.

Rachel's Diary – Do Not Touch!!!

September 29, 2010 – My First Day Here

Today (be) _______ (1) the first day at my new school. Right now, it is lunch time, and

all of the students (eat) _______ _________ (2) their lunches. They (sit) _______

_________ (3) around the big table in the cafeteria, (talk) ________ (4) in small groups. I

(sit) _______ ________ (5) alone. I (be) _______ (6) pretty nervous. I (hope) _______ (7)

the other students (not, think) _______ _______ ________ (8) I am weird. I (write)

_______ ________ (9) in my diary right now to look like I (have) _______ (10) something

important to do.

For lunch today, I (have) _______ (11) an apple, pretzels, and a tuna fish sandwich. I

(hate) _______ (12) tuna fish, but my mom (love) ________ (13) it. She (say) _______ (14) it is

good for me. She (pack) ________ (15) it for me every day, so I (guess) ________ (16) I

have to eat it. I (also, have) ________ ________ (17) some cookies. At least I (like)

________ (18) to eat those.

Hey! The girls at the big table (look) _______ ________ (19) at me! What (they, want)

_______ ________ ________ (20)? They (laugh) _______ ________ (21) at something.

What (they, laugh) _______ ________ _________ (22) at? I hope they (not, laugh)

_______ _______ _________ (23) at me. I (get) _______ ________ (24) nervous again.

Oh my gosh! One of them (come) ______ _________ (25) this way! Stay calm,Rachel. She is not going to hurt you. She is just another girl like you, right?

Wait. Now she (hold) _______ _________ (26) out her hand to me. Does she (want)

________ (27) to be friends? What (she, do) _______ ________ _________ (28)? Oh, I

know! She (invite) _______ _________ (29) me to her table! Maybe I (be, not) _______

_______ (30) that weird after all!

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Name ________________ Date ________________


Fill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in simple present perfect tense.

Note: To form the simple present perfect tense, has or have is used with a past participle (the word that comes

after "had") to describe an action that has happened in the past and may still be happening. The past

participle is often regular , and therefore retains its simple past tense spelling, as “visited” does here.

Example: I / You / We / they (visit) have visited Argentina before.

Example: He / She / It (visit) has visited Argentina before.

1) I (visit) _______ ________ Australia before.

2) You (visit) _______ ________ Mexico before.

3) We (visit) _______ ________ Canada before.4) They (visit) _______ ________ China before.

5) He (visit) _______ ________ Africa before

6) She (visit) _______ ________ India before.

7) It (visit) _______ ________ Europe before.



Note: All of the past participles used will be regular .

Example: John (walk) has walked to school since first grade. He is in fifth grade now.

Example: The girls (finish) have finished cleaning their rooms. Now they can go shopping.

1) Our company (arrive) ______ ________. Please answer the door.

2) The ice on the sidewalk (melt) _______ ________. I think the sun is out today.

3) The McMillans (prepare) _______ _________ a lot of food for the party. It looks delicious.

4) Tony’s flight from New Jersey (land) _______ ________. We should see him any minute.5) The bank officers (suggest) _______ _________ that the meeting be scheduled for

Wednesday morning. I will try to locate a conference room.

6) Sparky (taste) _______ ________ his new dog food, and he seems to like it.

7) The police (arrest) _______ ________ two men for the robbery. It is time to question them.

8) The medicine (cure) _______ ________ William’s illness. It seems miraculous.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




Name ________________ Date ________________


Present TenseFill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in simple present perfect tense.

Note: In this exercise, all of the past participles are irregular . This means that they have

unexpected changes in spelling and pronunciation which are not the same as the simple past

forms. You may want to refer to a list of irregular verbs to find irregular past participles.

Example: Amy (eat) has eaten lunch already.

Example: Amy and Arnold (eat) have eaten lunch already.

1) Mark (eat) _______ ________ dinner already. He is not hungry.

2) Beth (write) _______ ________ three letters today. She misses her family.

3) Yoko and Armand (take) _______ ________ the test. Now they

can relax.

4) Marty and I (be) _______ ________ to Costa Rica three times.

We are familiar with the culture.

5) I (drink) _______ _______ six cups of water today.

6) Eva (sing) _______ ________ in a chorus before. Her voice is pretty.7) Chong-Li (get) _______ ________ very good at speaking English. She has

practiced a lot.

8) Lucy (hide) _______ ________ in the woods. Now her friends will try to find her.

9) It (be) _______ ________ a good week so far.

10) You (show) ________ _________ that you are a hard worker. Good job!

11) Daisy (wear) _______ _________ a dress to work every day this week.

12) Mr. Lee (drive) _______ ________ from Texas to Iowa for the conference. He

needs to get some rest before it starts.

13) Juan (ride) _______ ________ horses since he was a little boy. It is easy for him.

14) Mr. and Mrs. Sanchez (become) _______ ________ grandparents. Their daughter,

Josefina, had a baby yesterday.

15) The movie (begin) _______ _______. Please be quiet!

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




Name ________________ Date ________________


Present TenseFill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in simple present perfect tense.Then, indicate whether the past participle is regular or irregular .

Example: Ida (look) has looked all morning for her glasses. She still can’t

find them. (regular / irregular)

Example: The wind (blow) has blown our patio furniture away. Let’s go get

it. (regular / irregular )

1) Charity (break) _______ ________ her leg on the ski slope. Please dial 911.

(regular / irregular)

2) The city (allow) _______ ________ residents to shoot off fireworks each year on the

Fourth of July. (regular / irregular)

3) The lake (freeze) _______ ________ solid. Now we can go skating. (regular /

irregular)

4) The sun (rise) _______ ________. It’s time to get up. (regular / irregular)

5) The army (battle) _______ ________ the enemy for two weeks. The soldiers are

exhausted. (regular / irregular )

6) The principal (introduce) _______ _________ the new teacher. She seems very

nice. (regular / irregular)

7) Using his telescope, Jeremy (see) _______ _______ other galaxies. He writes them

on his blog. (regular / irregular)

8) The judge (listen) _______ _________ to all of the evidence. Now he will make a

ruling. (regular / irregular)

9) The strawberries (spoil) _______ ________. They should have been kept in therefrigerator. (regular / irregular)

10) The doctor (write) _______ ________ a book about disease prevention. It will be

published soon. (regular / irregular)

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Name ________________ Date ________________



Example: I / You / We / they (visit) have visited Venezuela before.

Example: He / She / It (visit) has visited Venezuela before.

Example: Susan (run) has run a marathon race before.

Example: Paul and his brother (drive) have driven to New England before.

1) I (visit) _______ ________ Tennessee before.

2) You (visit) _______ ________ Utah before.

3) We (visit) _______ ________ North Carolina before.

4) They (visit) _______ ________ California before.

5) He (visit) _______ ________ Texas before.

6) She (visit) _______ ________New York before.

7) It (visit) _______ ________ Colorado before.

8) They (take) _______ ________ the test. Now they must wait for their scores.

9) I (eat) _______ ________ dinner already. I am not hungry.

10) All of the children (brush) _______ ________ their teeth. Now it's time for bed.

11) Andrew (finish) _______ ________ his work. He is ready to take a break.

12) Mimi (play) _______ ________ golf before.

13) I (see) _______ ________ this movie before. I don't want to watch it again.

14) I (wash) _______ ________ my clothes. Now I can put them on.

15) You (complete) _______ _________ this exercise. Hooray!

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Name ________________ Date ________________

Note: These sentences use verbs and adverbs. An adverb says something more about

the action of a verb.

Example: Juliet (always, work) has always worked at the library.

Example: The six-year-olds (happily, play) have happily played outside for an

hour.

1) The babysitter (often, cook) _______ ________ _________ dinner for the children

lately because their parents have been working late.

2) Mr. and Mrs. Thompson (never, travel) ________ ________ _________ overseas.

They like staying closer to home.

3) Professor Alvarez (usually, test) _______ ________ ________ his biology class

twice each semester. Occasionally, though, he gives three tests.

4) Tim and Todd (sometimes, play) _______ _________ _______ banjos

at the festival. We hope they will be able to play there this year.5) In the aftermath of last week’s hurricane, the volunteers (willingly, work)

______ _________ ________ long hours. Many are exhausted, but refuse to

quit.

6) The teacher (already, plan) _______ ________ _________ a party for her students

because she feels that they have worked very hard and deserve to celebrate.

7) The florist (quickly, arrange) _______ ________ _________ the flowers for the

wedding. Now that he is finished, the caterers are bringing in food for the reception.

8) Mr. and Mrs. Yang (frequently, travel) _______ _________ _________ home to

Shanghai since they moved to New York City. They like living near their daughter’s

family in New York, but miss their old friends back home.



7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Name ________________ Date ________________



Affirmative (+) :

Example: Charles (taste) has tasted Guacamole before.

Example: We (visit) have visited China six times.

Example: They (already, finish) have already finished their homework.

Negative (-) :

Example: We (not, eat) have not eaten dinner yet.

1) Mrs. Polanski (know) _______ ________ Peter since he was a little boy. She has lived next

door to his family for many years.

2) After eight hours, Angel and Roberto (arrive) _______ ________ in California. They drove

there today from New Mexico, and want to go to San Diego tomorrow.

3) Nastia (live) ______ ________ in Norway for twenty-two years. She enjoys living

there. She doesn’t mind the cold winters, but she especially likes to spend summer vacations

at the North Sea.

4) Ariel (be) _______ ________ a gymnast for eight years. She (break) _______

________ six bones since she began practicing gymnastics. She likes to get her friends tosign her casts.

5) (You, be) ________ _______ ________ to Africa before? I (hear) ________

_________ it is beautiful there. I would like to go on a safari in Kenya.

6) The President (speak) _______ _________. His decision is final. Many people don’t agree

with him, but making hard decisions is part of his job. I would not want that job!

7) The letter you sent me (not, arrive) _______ _______ _________ yet. I (check)

_______ ________ my mailbox for it every day. I wonder where it could be.

8) I (wait) _______ ________ for thirty minutes and my friend (not, come) _______

_______ ________ to meet me. I am a little worried about her, because she is always on

time.

9) I (visit) ________ _________ Spain before. It is a beautiful country. I love the old, southern

city of Cádiz, which has wonderful plazas and beaches.

http://maps.google.com/aclk?sa=L&ai=Cm26fMB6aTdb0OqKm0AGYz5XHDOXJ5jGru5-kD__0loEBCAAQASCvkP8FUMXL-pn5_____wFg1QXIAQGpAi2W2dl04bc-qgQhT9DaAnBXXqNy308zpMl4ZRq2kvDwPkU2zH9z4mtJZ5UB&ggladgrp=8590368121309655969&gglcreat=3344670090234364857&sig=AGiWqtwUt07SqtM4OcPawVEMpeJUE2fo0A&adurl=http://www.booking.com/city/es/cadiz.html%3Faid%3D303948%3Blabel%3Dcadiz-rv2ATSY5ZRDc0b4XcPu0rwS4013089851%3Bws%3D

http://maps.google.com/aclk?sa=L&ai=Cm26fMB6aTdb0OqKm0AGYz5XHDOXJ5jGru5-kD__0loEBCAAQASCvkP8FUMXL-pn5_____wFg1QXIAQGpAi2W2dl04bc-qgQhT9DaAnBXXqNy308zpMl4ZRq2kvDwPkU2zH9z4mtJZ5UB&ggladgrp=8590368121309655969&gglcreat=3344670090234364857&sig=AGiWqtwUt07SqtM4OcPawVEMpeJUE2fo0A&adurl=http://www.booking.com/city/es/cadiz.html%3Faid%3D303948%3Blabel%3Dcadiz-rv2ATSY5ZRDc0b4XcPu0rwS4013089851%3Bws%3D

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Name ________________ Date ________________


Fill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in present perfect progressive tense.

Note: The present perfect progressive tense expresses the idea that something hashappened continuously since some time in the past, and is still happening now.

Example: I / You / We / They (work) have been working for two hours.

Example: He / She / It (work) has been working for two hours.

1) I (write) _______ _______ _________ my new book for ten months.

Writing it has been taken a lot of hard work and research. Thankfully,

it is almost finished.

2) The runners (race) _______ _______ _________ since 9:00 in the morning. Now it

is 3:00 p.m., and the leaders are about to cross the finish line.

3) The weather has been dreary all week. It (rain) _______ _______ _________ since

Monday. Hopefully, we will have some sunshine this weekend.

4) Anthony (play) _______ _______ ________ soccer his entire life. Soon, he will go

to college on a soccer scholarship.

5) The) baby (cry) _______ _______ _________ all night. He has been doing that

every night since he was born. His parents are so tired. They are hoping that his

sleeping habits will change soon!

6) Julian and I (try) _______ _______ _________ to find jobs for two weeks. We are a

little discouraged, but we cannot give up.

7) Mrs. Burk is giving her students an algebra test right now. The students (take) _______ _______ _________ the test for thirty-five minutes. They have five

minutes until time is up.

8) Ichiro is worried because his keys are lost. He needs to go to work. He (look)

_______ _______ _________ for them for fifteen minutes. Let’s help him.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Name ________________ Date ________________


Present TenseFill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in present perfect progressive tense.

Affirmative (+)

Example: He (wait) has been waiting on the train for two hours.

Negative (-)

Example: Don't worry. We (not, wait) have not been waiting for you for long.

1) The children (play) _______ _______ _________ outside all day. They must be getting

hungry by now. They need to come inside for dinner.

2) This week, we (read) _______ _______ _________ selections from the Romantic Period in

Literature class. My favorite Romantic authors are Poe and Hawthorne.

3) The criminal has not been caught yet. The police (chase) _______ _______ _________ him

since yesterday.

4) Lu Peng (make) _______ _______ _________ bread all day. It smells so good! His bakery is

next door to our shop. We are taking two loaves of his fresh bread home when we close the

shop tonight.

5) The construction workers (build) _______ _______ _________ that house all winter. They

(not, work) _______ _______ _______ _________ on it this week, though, because it (rain)

_______ _______ _________ every day since Monday.

6) The roses (not, bloom) _______ _______ _______ _________ much lately. We (not, water)

_______ _______ _______ _________ them enough. The soil is getting dry.

7) I (not, sleep) _______ _______ _______ _________ very well lately. I think I need to get

more exercise during the day. That would help me to feel tired at night.

8) Akira (learn) _______ _______ _________ about plants in her biology class. She is paying

close attention to the lectures. She wants to become a botanist some day.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Name ________________ Date ________________


Fill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in simple present perfect tenseor present perfect progressive tense.

Simple Present Perfect Tense:

Example: Charles (taste) has tasted guacamole before.

Example: Edie (not, call) has not called her parents yet.

Example: We (already, finish) have already finished our homework.

Example: (He, eat) Has he eaten dinner yet?

Present Perfect Progressive Tense:

Example: He (wait) has been waiting on the bus for an hour.

Example: She (not, do) has not been doing very well in school lately.Example: (They, swim) Have they been swimming in the lake?

1) We (already, bake) _______ ________ ________ the cake. Now, we just have to decorate it

with icing. Would you like to help?

2) Have you ever been to Italy? I (see) _______ _______ pictures of the town of Assisi. Some

day, I would like to travel there to see its beautiful churches.

3) The voters (elect) _______ ________ a new governor. She (make) _______ _______

_________ her acceptance speech for the past thirty minutes. I hope she will finish soon!4) The package I sent to Pablo (not, arrive) _______ _______ _________ yet. He (call)

_______ _______ _________ the Post Office every day. I don't know what happened to it.

5) The fishermen (not, catch) _______ _______ _________ many fish today. A strong wind

(blow) _______ _______ _________ all day, and they are having trouble with their nets.

6) (Edward, receive) _______ ________ ________ the money yet? I sent it to him last week.

7) Mahmoud and Rickie are dirty. They (play) _______ _______ _________ outside all day. It

is time for them to come in and take a bath.

8) (You, hear) _______ _______ ________ the news? There was a terrible earthquake in Haiti!

The residents need a lot of help.

9) Igor (want) _______ ________ to visit Paris for years. He (save) _______ _______

_________ his money for a plane ticket. He (almost, save) _______ _______ ________

enough.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Name ________________ Date ________________

Mrs. Rogers: Good afternoon, Mr. Tenny. Thank you for coming to the interview today. I

am so glad you could make time to meet.

Mr. Tenny: Hello, Mrs. Rogers. It’s nice to meet you. I (hear) _______ ________ (1) that

your company has grown and needs more space.

Mrs. Rogers: Yes, that’s why we’re searching for an architect. May I ask you some

questions about your employment history and professional experience? That way, we can

both decide whether the job is a good fit for you.

Mr. Tenny: Sure.

Mrs. Rogers: Okay. On your resume, it says that you (work) _______ _______

_________ (2) as an architect for the last eighteen years. Is that right?

Mr. Tenny: Yes, that's correct. I (have) _______ _______ (3) a lot of experience in the field

during those years. It has been a great career for me. I (always, love) _______ ________

________ (4) architecture, ever since I visited the pyramids in Egypt as a young boy.Mrs. Rogers: The pyramids are fascinating. But, I would guess that you have not spent

your career designing pyramids.

Mr. Tenny (laughing): No! Not at all. I have designed many different types of buildings,

both for commercial and private use.

Mrs. Rogers: Well, we are looking for someone to design our next office building. We

have outgrown the space we have, and need to move ahead on a new building right away.

We’re thinking about a building around twenty stories tall. (You, have) _______ ______

_______ (5) any experience with buildings of that size?

Mr. Tenny: Yes. I (design) _______ ________ (6) several tall buildings, including a twenty-

two-story bank building in Atlanta and a twenty-five-story insurance building in Utah. I also

oversaw the construction of two thirty-five-story buildings in Texas. Those were built for an

oil refining company.

EExxeer r cciissee 3377Review of the Present Perfect Tense

Fill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in simplepresent perfect tense or present perfect progressive tense.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Mrs. Rogers: You certainly have worked with people from a wide range of professions.

Mr. Tenny: That’s true, and it is part of what makes my work interesting.

Mrs. Rogers: That's great. Now, can you please tell me a bit about the project you (work)

_______ _______ _________ (7) on recently? I understand that you are using a lot of

technology in this one.

Mr. Tenny: That’s right. For the past two months, I (assemble) _______ _______

_________ (8) a team to build an energy-efficient, environmentally-friendly building. It will use

solar energy. I (spend) _______ ________ _________ (9) a lot of my time on this project

lately.

Mrs. Rogers: Yes, I (hear) _______ ________ (10) a lot about your new project. I (read)

_______ _______ _________ (11) about it in the newspaper for the past few weeks. It

sounds exciting. Mr. Tenny: Yes, it is. It will be different than any other building I (work) _______

________ (12) on. Is your company interested in including “green technology” in your new

buildings?

Mrs. Rogers: Yes, we are--very much so. Our board of directors feels that our buildings

should have as little impact on the environment as possible. Also, we are concerned about

working conditions. We would like to include a nice outdoor park area with a walking track

and picnic tables for our employees.

Mr. Tenny: That is wonderful. That (become) _______ ________ (13) a trend in new

construction for office buildings in the past few years. Employees need exercise. They

need to take at least one break from their computer screens every day and get outdoors.

Mrs. Rogers: I agree.

Mr. Tenny: Is there anything else you would like to know while I am here?

Mrs. Rogers: Not at the moment. I think I (get) _______ ________ (14) all the information I

need for now. Thank you for coming. We will be holding a second series of interviews with

the top candidates. Our Vice President of Development, Mr. Ferguson, will be in charge of

those. I expect we will be contacting you shortly.

Mr. Tenny: Wonderful. I (enjoy) _______ ________ (15) our talk. Have a nice day, Mrs.

Rogers.

Mrs. Rogers: You too, Mr. Tenny.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




Name ________________ Date ________________


Present Tense –

Cumulative ReviewFill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in any aspect of the present tense.

Ring! Ring!

Beto: Hello.

Justin: May I please speak to Beto?

Beto: Yes, this is he.

Justin: Beto! How (be) _______ (1) you? This is Justin.

Beto: Ahhh…Justin! I (be) ______ _ (2) fine. How are you?

Justin: I’m great, thanks.

Beto: That (be) _______ (3) good. So, what’s up?

Justin: Well, I (have) _______ (4) a question for you.

Beto: Sure.

Justin: My motorcycle (be) _______ (5) broken. I (try) _______ ______ _________ (6) to

repair it for days. I (no, know) _______ _______ _______ (7) what is wrong with

it. I (no, can, fix) ________ _______ (8) it.

Justin: Have you tried to start it?

Beto: Yes, I (try) _______ ________ (9) to start it many times, but it just won’t work.

The motorcycle is pretty new. I just got it last November.

Beto: Hmm. Well, what (happen) ________ (10) when you try to start it? What kind of

noise does it make?

Justin: It (make) ________ (11) a strange sound. Then the engine (die) _______ (12).

Beto:Okay. (You, stand) _______ _______ _________

(13)

beside it right now?Justin: Yes.

Beto: Okay. There are some things that you need to check. First, you need to

inspect the spark plugs.

Justin: Hold on. Okay, I (inspect) _______ _________ (14) them under a light now.

They look clean.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Beto: Okay, that's good. Now, you need to check the oil. It’s possible that you don’t

have enough.

Justin: Hold on. Okay, I (check) _______ _________ (15) the oil right now. It (look)

_______ (16) clean, and the tank is full. I just filled it up last week, so I didn’t think

that would be the problem.

Beto: Okay, that’s good. Now you need to test the battery. (You, have) _______

_______ _______ (17) a battery tester?

Justin: Yes, I do. My brother got me one for my birthday.

Let’s see…okay, I (use) _______ _________ (18) it right now. The battery

(appear) ________ (19) to be full of life.

Beto: Hmm. That is strange. I (wonder) ________ (20) what the problem could be!

Justin: Yes…very strange. I (not, understand) _______ _______ ________ _ (21) it. My

brother thinks the motorcycle is trash. He (not, think) _______ _______

________ (22) it will ever start again. He (say) _______ (23) I need to take it to the

junkyard.

Beto: That’s too bad. Well, there (be) _______ (24) one more thing you can check.

Justin: Really?

Beto: Yes, but I am sure you (check) _______ ________ (25) it already. It’s probably

the first thing you thought of.

Justin: Well, what is it?

Beto: The gas level.

Justin: Wait! I (not, check) _______ _______ ________ (26) that yet! Hold on! I

(check) _____ _________ (27) the gas level now.

Beto: Well, what (do) _______ (28) it look like?

Justin: It (look) _______ (29) empty! Wow, that (be) _______ (30) the problem. How

embarrassing. I am sorry that I bothered you about this!Beto: That’s okay. The same thing (happen) _______ ________ (31) to me before.

You had better go get some gas! Talk you to you later!

Justin: Okay, thanks!

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


●●●●●●R R eeaad d T T hheeoor r y y ..OOr r g g © © 2 2 0 0 110 0 Name ________________

EEnngglliisshhFFoor r EEvveer r yyoonnee..OOr r gg © © 2 2 0 0 0 0 8 8 Date ________________

““ A A CChhr r iissttmmaass iinn MMaar r cchh”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess

Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below.

Just before Christmas in 1944, a letter arrived at our house in Philadelphia.The postmark was from Tuskegee, Alabama, so we all knew who it was

from. We excitedly gathered around Mother as she opened it at thekitchen table.

My Dear Mother,

I did not get the leave I expected for Christmas. I will miss all of you. Pleaseleave the Christmas tree up until I make it back. I hope to be home by March.

Love from your son,

Clifton

I was 17-years-old at the time. My heart sank. I felt a profound sadness about myfavorite brother not being home for Christmas. He was one of the Tuskegee

Airmen and was responsible for maintaining the airplanes flying off to fight inWorld War II.

My mother, being the optimist she always was, said, “Well, it looks like we’ll getto have two Christmases this year!”

After Christmas, my sister and I worked together to make sure we kept that

Christmas tree looking as pretty as possible. This was no easy feat.

By mid January, the branches drooped so low to the ground that they became asliding board for the decorations. Each day, there were brand new sprinklings ofpine needles all over the wooden floor. My sister and I took turns sweeping themup. We repositioned the ornaments to the stronger branches on the tree, hopingthey would stay on.

Each time we freshened that tree up, my sister and I were full of thoughts aboutClifton and how happy we would be to see him again. It made us feel that he wasclose by, even though he was hundreds of miles away.

On March 5, the doorbell rang. We ran to the door and gave Clifton a big hug. Ashe hugged my Mother, I could see him peak over her head at the Christmas tree.

“It’s beautiful,” he said. “Thank you.” Clifton opened his presents and told us allsorts of stories about his work in Tuskegee.

That night as we slept, we heard a crash in the living room. We all ran to seewhat had happened. The tree had toppled onto the sofa and there were needlesand broken ornaments everywhere. We all had a good laugh. It wasfortuitous Clifton got home when he did!

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Questions:

11)) How did the narrator's mood shiftafter Clifton's letter was read to the

family?

A. from grand to humble B. from jubilance to anger C. from uncertainty to clarity D. from excitement to

disappointment

22)) The mother is an optimist. Thismeans she...

A. is not easily upset.B. upholds high standards.C. maintains a positive viewpoint.D. considers all outcomes before

making a decision.

33)) What can we conclude from theletter?

▼Check all that are correct.

A. □ Clifton misses his family.

B. □ Clifton will be home byMarch.

C. □ Clifton will not be home forChristmas.

D. □ Clifton is one of the Tuskegee Airmen.

44)) Which word best describes the workthe sisters did to help keep the tree

looking pretty?

A. It was a miracle. B. It was a debacle. C. It was a discovery.D. It was a collaboration.

55)) What is the most likely reason thenarrator compared the tree limbs toa sliding board ?

A. The limbs were so high in theair.

B. The ornaments were slipping off.C. The sisters liked to play on

them.D. The branches felt slippery with

no needles on them.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Questions (continued):

66)) "Each day, there were brand new sprinklings of pine needles all over thewooden floor."

"My sister and I took turns sweeping them up."

▼ What is the best way to combine the above sentences?

A. Each day, there were brand new sprinklings of pine needles all over thewooden floor, therefore, my sister and I took turns sweeping them up.

B. Each day, there were brand new sprinklings of pine needles all over thewooden floor, and so my sister and I took turns sweeping them up.

C. Each day, there were brand new sprinklings of pine needles all over thewooden floor because my sister and I took turns sweeping them up.

D. Each day, there were brand new sprinklings of pine needles all over thewooden floor until my sister and I took turns sweeping them up.

77)) What did caring for the tree come torepresent for the sisters?

A. a continual hardship B. a way of being close to their

brotherC. a hope that the war would end

soon D. an indication that they did not

know when Clifton would return

88)) What other title would fit thispassage best?

A. "Flying Home"B. “A Christmas War” C. "Granting Clifton's Wish" D. “The Disappointing Letter”

99)) How does Clifton seem to feel whenhe sees the Christmas tree?

A. appreciativeB. disappointedC. estranged D. remorseful

1100)) Which describe fortuitous circumstances?

▼Check all that make sense.

A. □ getting the last seat on thebus

B. □ having an umbrella when it

begins to rain

C. □ reporting a robbery after yousee it happen

D. □ doing well in a test you havestudied hard for

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““ A A CCoolldd DDaayy”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


It is a frigid January day in York, Pennsylvania.

The temperature is below freezing. Snow is starting to fall.

Dr. James turns on the television to check the weather.

He must leave for his work at the hospital soon.

“Today is going to be very cold,” says the TV weatherman. “Be sure to wear verywarm clothes when you go outside. Also, be careful driving on the roads.

Snowfall will make them slippery. In fact, if you can stay home today, do it!”

Dr. James cannot stay home. Very sick people are waiting to see him at thehospital.

He goes to his closet. He takes out the warmest clothes he has.

He puts on a sweater, jacket, gloves, socks, boots and a hat.

He opens his front door to go to work. A gust of cold air blows inside.

“Wow, it is very cold outside,” Dr. James says. He is from Miami and does notlike the cold. “The weatherman was right!”

Before he can drive to work, Dr. James must clear the snow off his car.

He does this very fast. He hops in the car. He shivers. His neck feels especiallycold.

Dr. James drives slowly to work. Everyone else is driving slowly, too. There is alot of traffic on the road. There are cars in front and behind.

Suddenly, the cars in front of Dr. James come to a stop. There has beenan accident!

Dr. James hurries from his car to check on the driver of the car that has swervedoff the road. “Is everyone okay?” Dr. James asks.

“Yes, yes, we are fine. We slipped on a patch of ice,” the driver says. “This wouldhave been a good day to stay home in bed.”

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Questions:

11)) What does it mean if the weatheris frigid ?

A. It is very cold.

B. It is very rainy. C. It is very windy. D. It is very slippery.

22)) In what city does this story takeplace?

A. Florida B. Miami C. Pennsylvania D. York

33)) Why doesn't Dr. James stay hometoday?

A. There are sick people waiting forhim.

B. He does not believe theweatherman.

C. He has to clear the snow off hiscar.

D. He must help the people in theaccident.

44)) What could Dr. James have put onhis neck to keep it warm?

A. mittens B. a scarf C. another hat D. an undershirt

55)) What does Dr. James do before heleaves for work?


A. □ dresses warmly

B. □ calls the hospital

C. □ watches the weather

D. □ clears the snow from his car

66)) Given what is said in the story, whatis most likely true about Miami?

A. It is a hot place.B. It is a rainy place. C. It is a windy place. D. It is a place where people drive

slowly.

77)) How are people driving today?

A. badly B. slowly C. very fast D. like they do not care

88)) What does it mean if the roadsare slippery?

A. The roads are full of cars.B. The roads are easy to slide on. C. The roads are very long and

curvy.D. The roads lead to a place with

lots of snow.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



99)) Why does Dr. James clear the snowoff his car quickly?

A. He is very cold.B. He is late for work.C. He knows his patients are

waiting.D. He knows he will have to drive

slowly.

1100)) There is a lot of traffic on theroad. Choose another way to writethis sentence.

A. There is a lot of snow on theroad.

B. There are a lot of cars on theroad.

C. There are a lot of accidents onthe road.

D. There are a lot of people walkingon the road.

1111)) Why did the car have an accident?

A. because it was snowing outsideB. because Dr. James hit the carC. because it was so cold outsideD. because the car slipped on a

patch of ice

1122)) What is an accident?

A. something that happens onlywith cars

B. something that happens only inthe snow

C. something that happens that hasnot been planned

D. something that happensbecause other people want it to

1133)) What is the weatherman rightabout?


A. □ It is a windy day

B. □ It is very cold outside.

C. □ The roads are slippery.

D. □ There will be an accident.

1144)) Why does Dr. James hurry from hiscar after the accident?

A. He is very cold.B. He wants to get to the hospital.C. He is worried about his patients.D. He wants to make sure the

people in the car are okay.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““ A A DDaayy LLiikkee NNoo OOtthheer r ”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


Frank Wilcox has been chief of police in Lansett County for 25 years. He had justturned 30 when he took the job.

He has seen murders. He has seen robberies. He has seen cats stuck in trees.He has found missing children.

Today would be like no other.

It is 11:00 at night. Chief Wilcox begins putting together his things. He is tired. Hewants to go home.

“Chief Wilcox,” calls an officer walking quickly into his office. It is Officer

Simpson. He looks nervous. He looks like he would like to be anywhere else butthere.

“What is it, Simpson?” asks the Chief.

“Holman’s Grocery was just held up at gun point,” Simpson says. His voiceis shaky. He coughs to clear his throat.

“Was anyone hurt?” asks Chief.

Lansett is a very small county. The Chief knows just about everyone who livesthere. If anyone was hurt, there is a good chance he knows who it was. Maybe

that's why Officer Simpson looks nervous.

“No one was hurt,” says Simpson. “But we caught the suspect.”

“Ah, well, Simpson. You guys can take care of that. I’m --,” Chief Wilcox stops inmid-sentence.

He understands what is wrong. From behind Officer Simpson, the Chief sees hisyoungest daughter, Devon. She is in handcuffs.

Chief Wilcox gets a lump in his throat. He is in disbelief. “How could it be?” hethinks.

“Devon, will you please tell me what is going on?” the Chief demands.

Devon does not look at him. The Chief can feel anger growing inside of him.He refuses to let that anger show.

“Take her back for questioning,” the Chief says to Officer Simpson in a calmvoice.

“Devon, whatever you do, tell the truth,” the Chief says. “I’m your dad. I love you.We will figure this out.”

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Questions:

11)) What is the main problem in thisstory?

A. Devon won't look at her dad.

B. Officer Simpson is nervous. C. The Chief's daughter has been

arrested. D. The Chief is tired and wants to

go home.

22)) How long has Wilcox been Chief?

A. ____________________

_______________________

_______________________

33)) What can the reader tell about ChiefWilcox?


A. □ He has seen a lot in his job.

B. □ He wants the truth.

C. □ He is 30-years-old.

D. □ He can stay calm even whenhe is angry.

44)) Why does Chief want to go home?

A. He is hungry. B. He is tired.

C. He does not want to see Devon. D. He is worried about his family.

55)) Why is Officer Simpson nervous?

A. He is scared of Chief Wilcox.

B. He has just been held up at gunpoint. C. He has just arrested Chief's

daughter. D. He has just found an important

piece of evidence in a new case.

66)) Choose all that are correct. Whatdoes it mean to be shaky ?

A. to be loud B. to be hard to hear C. to be unsure and unsteady D. to be strong and uncontrollable

77)) When does Chief know what iswrong with Officer Simpson?

A. when he sees the gun B. when he stands up C. when Officer Simpson tells him D. when he sees his daughter

88)) "He refuses to let that anger show."Which sentence below means thesame thing?

A. He is forced to let that angershow.

B. He is about to let that angershow.

C. He wants to let that anger show.D. He decides not to let that anger

show.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



99)) Why might Devon have not looked ather father?

A. She did not see him. B. She felt ashamed. C. The handcuffs hurt. D. She is the youngest daughter.

1100)) How do Chief's feelings changeduring the story?

A. from tired, to disbelief, to anger,to love

B. from tired, to love, to disbelief, toanger

C. from tired, to love, to anger, todisbelief

D. from tired, to anger, to disbelief,to love

1111)) How old is Chief?

A. ____________________

_______________________

_______________________

1122)) Why might Chief feel different than

any other parent about his child'sarrest?

A. Devon is a girl. B. Devon is his youngest child. C. He is a police officer. D. Devon may have had a gun.

How do you think Chief should handle this case? Explain.

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““ A A HHaappppyy VViissiittoor r ”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess

Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below

It is Thursday. It is raining today. It is a rainy day.

Anna is inside the house. Anna is watching TV. Anna is watching TV inside thehouse.

Anna cannot go outside. It is raining outside. Anna cannot go outside because itis raining outside.

Anna is bored.

Wait!

Anna hears someone at the door. Someone is at the door of her house.

Anna opens the door. What does Anna see?

Anna sees a dog. The dog is small. Anna sees a small dog.

The dog is wet. The dog is wet from the rain.

"Awww! You are all wet!" Anna says to the dog. "You are very cute!"

"Mom!" Anna says.

"Yes dear?" says Anna's mom.

"There is a dog here! There is a dog at the door!" Anna says.

"What?" says Anna's mom. "A dog?"

Anna's mom comes to the door. Anna's mom sees the wet dog. The wet doglooks cute.

"Can we keep it?" asks Anna.

"Yes, we can," says Anna's mom.

The dog is happy.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Questions:

11)) What is the name of the girl in thestory?

A. ____________________

22)) What day of the week is it in thestory?

A. ____________________

33)) What is at the door of the house?

A. a manB. a catC. a dogD. a snake

44)) What happens at the end of the story?

A. Anna keeps the dog.B. Anna takes the dog to the

hospital. C. Anna’s mom says she cannot

keep the dog. D. Anna dries the dog with a towel.

55)) Is the dog dry or wet ?

A. The dog is dry. B. The dog is wet.

66)) How does the dog look?


A. □ cuteB. □ strongC. □ small D. □ angry

Do you think Anna should keep the dog? Why or why not?

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““ A A MMyysstteer r yy”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


“Something is very wrong,” says the detective.

“I know!” says Ms. Gervis. “It is wrong that someone has stolen from me!”

The detective looks around Ms. Gervis’ apartment. “That is not what I am talkingabout ma’am. What is wrong is that I do not understand how the robber got inand out.”

Ms. Gervis and the detective stand in silence. Ms. Gervis is upset.

“The robber did not come through the window,” says the detective. “Thesewindows have not been open or shut in months.”

The detective looks at the fireplace. “The robber did not squeeze down here.”

The detective walks to the front door. He examines the latch. “And therobber definitely did not use the front door.”

“I have no idea how he did it,” says a bothered Ms. Gervis. “It is a big mystery.”

“And you say the robber stole nothing else?” asks the detective. “No money, no jewelry, no crystal?”

“That’s right, detective. He took only what was important to me,” Ms. Gervis sayswith a sigh. “There is only one thing I can do now.”

“And what is that?” the detective asks with surprise.

“I will stop baking cakes,” Ms. Gervis says. “They are mine to give away. Theyare not for someone to steal.”

“You can’t do that!” says the detective with alarm . “Who will bake those deliciouscakes?”

“I am sorry. I do not know,” says Ms. Gervis.

“I must solve this case immediately!” says the detective.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Questions:

11)) Where does this story take place?

A. in a bakery B. at the police station C. in Ms. Gervis' house D. in Ms. Gervis' apartment

22)) If Ms. Gervis is upset, which best

describes how she would look?

A. She might smile a lot. B. Her eyes might be teary. C. Her clothes might be dirty. D. She might be sitting down.

33)) What makes the detective sure thatthe robber did not come through thewindow?

A. The windows are locked.B. The window faces the police

station.C. The windows have not been

used in months.D. The windows are too small for a

person to fit through.

44)) "And the robber definitely did notuse the front door." Choose the bestway to rewrite this sentence.

A. "And the robber may not haveused the front door."

B. "And the robber probably did notuse the front door."

C. "And the robber was not able touse the front door."

D. "And the robber certainly did notuse the front door."

55)) Which questions should thedetective have asked about thefront door?


A. □ Is the door old?

B. □ Is the door made of wood?

C. □ Does someone else have akey?

D. □ Does Ms. Gervis leave thedoor unlocked?

66)) What does Ms. Gervis do with hercakes?

A. eats them B. sells them C. hides them D. gives them away

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



77)) What does the detective seem tothink will happen if he solves themystery?

A. Ms. Gervis will start bakingcakes again.

B. Ms. Gervis will bake him extracakes.

C. Ms. Gervis will give him hersecret recipe.

D. Ms. Gervis will give him moneyand jewels.

88)) What is a mystery?

A. something that is wrong

B. something that happens at nightC. something a robber leaves

behindD. something that cannot be

explained

99)) What else was stolen from theapartment?

A. crystal B. jewelry C. money D. nothing

1100)) If something is said with alarm,how is it said?

A. with fear and panicB. with bells and whistlesC. with smiles and laughterD. with sadness and tears

Do you like mysteries? What is your favorite kind of story? Explain.

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““ A Accccuusseedd”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


Elizabeth was brooding in her room. She had sought asylum theresince spurious gossip began circulating about her at Seagrove

Academy last week.

Not that Elizabeth had ever been considered a social butterfly. She preferred tolive vicariously through the brazen stories of her friends: late night partying,fraternizing with boys, childish pranks. Still, she has taken to being more byherself than usual since the allegations surfaced.

Up for consideration for the highly coveted Blauvelt Award, a scholarshiprecognizing “academic integrity and promise,” an anonymous student had givenheadmaster Billings the “tip” that Elizabeth had cheated on several tests thisyear.

The accusations were laughable. Elizabeth had long been a stellar student atSeagrove. She lacked a natural intelligence - this was true. However, she morethan made up for this deficit through diligence and perseverance.

Still, the accusations had given the recommendation committee pause. Elizabeth

had been called to Mr. Billings’ grand office on Friday and asked copiousquestions about her recent exams. The experience was quite traumatic.

Seagrove is an elite school. Most of its students come from privilegedbackgrounds. This was not the case for Elizabeth. Her family had little money.She attended Seagrove on a full scholarship. The Blauvelt Award would help herfamily pay for college.

So, it was with the same diligence with which she applied herself to her studiesthat Elizabeth planned to unmask her accuser. She opened the school directoryon her bed and began combing through the names.

Seagrove was such a small and insular community. Twenty-one kids would be inher graduating class. Elizabeth knew it was inevitable that the person spreadingrumors about her would come to light. It was just a matter of time.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Questions:

11)) What is another word for spurious?

A. shameful B. ghastly C. hurtful D. untrue

22)) “However, she more than made upfor this deficit through diligence and

perseverance."

▼Choose the best way to paraphrase theabove sentence.

A. Elizabeth knew she needed towork hard to get the Blauvelt

Award. B. Any cheating Elizabeth did was

only because she lacked naturalintelligence.

C. Hard work and dedicationhelped make up for Elizabeth's

lack of natural intelligence. D. Mediocre studying and workhabits did not keep Elizabethfrom doing well in school.

33)) Which of the following could best bedescribed as brazen?

A. A dog chases a cat up into atree.

B. A man walks his dog during therain.C. A woman steps in front of a bus

to get it to stop.D. A little girl wins the National

Spelling Bee with hard work.

44)) Why would cheating have likelyknocked Elizabeth out of therunning for the Blauvelt Award?

A. Mr. Billings said this was the

case. B. Awards cannot be given tocheaters.

C. The award is based onacademic integrity.

D. Cheating would have meant theaward could not be used forcollege.

55)) How is Elizabeth different than many

of her peers?

A. She is diligent. B. She is honest. C. She is not wealthy. D. She likes to be alone.

66)) What does the reader learn about

the kind of school Seagrove Academy is?

A. a school for gifted students B. a school with many wealthy

students C. a school where many kids lie

and cheat D. a large school where it is hard to

get to know people

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



77)) What does the reader learn aboutthe student who accused Elizabethof cheating?


A. □ That student does not wantanyone to know who he or sheis.

B. □ That student is also acontender for the Blauvelt

Award.

C. □ That student is either lying ormistaken.

D. □ That the student is a formerfriend of Elizabeth's.

88)) What is the best antonymfor inevitable ?

A. impossibleB. unmistakableC. probableD. certain

99)) Why is Elizabeth so sure that shewill learn who has accused her ofcheating?

A. Her friends will help her.B. The community is so small.C. She thinks the person will come

forward.D. She thinks it will be the recipient

of the Blauvelt Award.

1100)) What was Elizabeth's first responseto being accused?

A. She became rabid. B. She became reclusive. C. She became vindicated. D. She became venerable.

1111)) Who is the antagonist in thispassage?

A. ElizabethB. Mr. BillingsC. the anonymous student

D. the recommendation committee

1122)) Why is this award most likely soimportant to Elizabeth?

A. It will prove she is smart.B. It will help her pay for college.C. It will make her parents proud.

D. It will prove she did not cheat.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““ A Alllliiggaattoor r ss”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


An alligator is a very big reptile.

Alligators can grow to more than 15 feet long.

An alligator has a long tail, stubby legs, very strong jaws and sharp teeth.

It eats fish, mammals and birds.

Alligators live in rivers and swamps where the weather is very warm.

There are lots of alligators in Florida.

Questions:

11)) What kind of animal is analligator?

A. an amphibian

B. a mammal C. a reptile

22)) What does an alligator look like?


A. □ It has long legs.

B. □ It has a short tail.

C. □ It has sharp teeth.

33)) What do alligators eat?


A. □ birds

B. □ cats

C. □ fish

44)) What does stubby mean?

A. big and juicy B. long and lean C. short and thick

55)) Which is thebest antonym for sharp?

A. dull B. gray C. soft

66)) What can the reader tell aboutFlorida from this passage?

A. It is far away. B. It is a very big place. C. It has rivers and swamps.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““ A Ann A Addvveennttuur r ee”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


Jaime is a boy.

Jaime lives in a house. Jaime lives in the country. Jaime livesin a house in the country.

Jaime has a dog. The dog is named Go-Go. Jaime and Go-Go are friends.

Jaime and Go-Go are bored. They want to do something new. They want to do

something fun. They want to do something exciting.

Jaime and Go-Go walk out of the house. They walk across the yard.They walk across the field. They jump over the fence.

Jaime sees a mountain. The mountain is very tall. The top of themountain is in the clouds. Jaime looks at the mountain.

“We are going to the top of that mountain,” Jaime says.

Go-Go looks nervous.

“Don't be nervous,” Jaime says.

Go-Go runs after Jaime. They walk toward the mountain. Jaime stops. He looksback at the house.

“I am a little tired,” Jaime says to Go-Go.

Go-Go licks Jaime’s face.

Jaime turns around.

“Come on Go-Go. We will climb the mountain tomorrow,” Jaime says.

Jaime starts to walk home.

Go-Go runs after Jaime.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Questions:

1) Where does Jaime live?

A. He lives in a house in the city.B. He lives in an apartment in the

country.C. He lives in a house in thecountry.D. He lives in an apartment in the

city.

2) What kind of animal is Go-Go?

A. ____________________

3) What does across mean?

A. underB. close toC. far away from

D. from one side to the other side

4) What does Jaime want to do atthe beginning of the story?

A. go homeB. climb a mountainC. go fishing in the river D. play a game with Go-Go

5) What does Jaime want to do atthe end of the story?

A. go homeB. climb a mountainC. go fishing in the river

D. play a game with Go-Go

6) Why is Go-Go nervous?

A. He is hungry.B. He wants to play catch.C. He doesn’t want to go home. D. He doesn’t want to climb the

mountain.

7) Jaime says he will climb themountain tomorrow. Is this true?

A. Probably.B. Probably not.

Would you like to live in the city, or would you like to live in the country? Why?

I would like to live in the ___________ because _________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““ A Annaa FFiinnddss aann A Appaar r ttmmeenntt”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


Ana, her husband Mario, and their four-year-old son, Antonio, just moved toNorth Carolina.

They need a temporary place to call home until they get settled into their newsurroundings.

Right now, they are staying in a hotel not far from Mario’s job.

Ana begins a search for an apartment for the family to live in.

First, Ana picks up an Apartment Book at the local newspaper stand. The Apartment Book contains listings of all the major apartment complexes in herarea.

Ana starts by looking at the prices for apartments in the Apartment Book. Then,she reads about the amenities that each apartment complex offers.

For example, some apartments have a clubhouse. Some have a gym, which isalso called a fitness center. Some have a pool. Some have all of these!

Ana notices that the more amenities an apartment complex has, the more it costseach month. She wants the family’s new apartment to be nice, but she does notwant to spend too much money on it. Ana and Mario are trying to save money to

buy a house.

After considering prices, amenities, and locations, Ana finds several apartmentcomplexes that she thinks the family will like.

Ana calls the apartment complexes. She sets up appointments with theapartment managers to see the apartments she thinks are interesting.

Ana makes five phone calls in total.

When Mario gets back to the hotel from work, Ana shows him the list ofapartments. “These look good,” he says.

The next day, while Mario is at work and Antonio is at childcare, Ana visits theapartment complexes.

She likes the fifth one the best. It is in a good school district. It has a pool, but nofitness center or clubhouse. It is near Mario’s job. Ana hopes to find a job nearby,as well.

When Ana gets back to the hotel, she discusses all that she has seen withMario. They decide to rent the last apartment Ana saw.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


The next day, Ana calls the manager of the apartment complex with the news.

The manager asks Ana and Mario to sign a lease and pay a security deposit.

If the family damages the apartment in any way while they are living there, thesecurity deposit will help to pay for the cost of repairs.

Ana and Mario sign a lease and pay the money. The manager asks them when

they plan to move in and Ana looks up at Mario. He looks back at her for amoment and then tells the manager, “In a few days.”

Finally, they have a place to stay.

Questions:

11)) What kind of book does Ana get?

A. a City Guide Book B. a Map Book

C. a House Book D. an Apartment Book

22)) What did Ana consider while lookingthrough the Apartment Book?

I. school districts

II. amenities

III. locations

A. I only

B. I and II C. II and II D. I, II, and III

33)) Where is Ana's family staying whilethey look for a place to call home?

A. in an apartment close to Mario’swork

B. at an apartment next to Antonio’s school

C. in Ana’s mother’s house D. in a hotel near Mario’s work

44)) What does Ana realize as she looksthrough the Apartment Book?

A. that the nicest apartments arefar away

B. that all the apartments are smalland cramped

C. that it is easy to find a niceapartment in a good schooldistrict

D. that the number of amenities isrelated to cost

55)) Why doesn't Ana want to spend toomuch money on an apartment?

A. her husband will get upset B. she does not have the money C. she cannot find one she likes D. she wants to save money for a

house

66)) In this story, which of the followingis not mentioned as an amenity?

A. carpet B. clubhouse C. fitness center D. pool

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



77)) What makes Ana like the fifthapartment best?

I. it has many amenities

II. it is near Mario’s job III. it is in a good school district

A. I only

B. I and II C. II and II D. I, II, and III

88)) Where is Antonio while Ana looks atapartments?

A. at daycare

B. at the hotelC. at schoolD. at work

99)) What does it meanto consider something?

A. to rent it B. to think about itC. to make it happenD. to read a book about it

1100)) "When Ana gets back to the hotel,she discusses all that she hasseen with Mario."

How can we best rewrite the abovesentence?

A. When Ana gets back to thehotel, she reads about all thatshe has seen with Mario.

B. When Ana returns to the hotel,she writes about all that she hasseen with Mario.

C. When Ana returns to the hotel,

she talks about all that she hasseen with Mario.

D. When Ana leaves the hotel, shetalks about all that she has seenwith Mario.

1111)) When will the family move intotheir new apartment?

A. in a day or two

B. in a couple daysC. in three or four daysD. in just under a week

1122)) Which is the best description ofa security deposit ?

A. money given to landlord to pay

for amenities B. money given to landlord to pay

for utilities and telephone C. money given to landlord to prove

the tenant can pay rent on time D. money given to the landlord to

pay for any damage to theapartment

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““BBaaiill”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


The phone rang at Pratt Taylor’s house at nearly three in the morning.

Pratt fumbled for the phone in the dark. He answered groggily after the fourthring.

“Hello,” Pratt mumbled into the receiver.

“Mr. Taylor. Thank goodness. I need your help.”

Pratt knew the voice, for sure. However, in his somnolent state, he could notquite place it.

“Mr. Taylor!” the man said again in a raspy, loud whisper. “I am in j ail. I wasallowed one phone call. I’m calling you.”

Then, the fog cleared. Although nearly ten years had passed since their lastencounter, Pratt was able to discern something familiar in this voice. It belongedto a boy named Martin Hall, easily one of the most brilliant math students he hadever had. But while Pratt recalled that Martin possessed an enviable acumen formath, he also had a knack for getting into trouble.

Still, they had forged a strong student-teacher bond, and when Martin graduated

from Linebrook High School, Pratt had told him, “Call me if there is anything youever need.”

So here it was – the call in the middle of the night.

“Yes, Martin. Is that you?”

“Yes, Mr. Taylor. Can you help?”

“What do you need?”

“Bail money.”

“What did you do?”

“We’ll talk about that later. Can you get me one thousand bucks?”

Pratt knew he could, but he was hesitant. What had Martin done? What wasPratt getting himself into? Pratt’s honor to his word helped make his decision.“Yes, I can. Where shall I bring it?”

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


“I’m at Jessup in Maryland. My brother will come by your place in the morning.Give the money to him, and he will come and bail me out.”

“Ok.”

The decision would be one that would irk Pratt for a very, very long time.

Questions:

11)) "Pratt fumbled for the phone in the dark. He answered groggily after the fourthring."

A. Pratt fumbled for the phone in the dark, he answered groggily after thefourth ring.

B. Pratt fumbled for the phone in the dark, and answered groggily on thefourth ring.

C. While Pratt fumbled for the phone in the dark, he answered groggily afterthe fourth ring.

D. Pratt answered the phone groggily after the fourth ring, fumbling for thephone in the dark.

22)) If someone is feeling somnolent,which best describes how he or shemight act?

A. irritated

B. lethargicC. maniacal D. nimble

33)) What does the author mean by thefollowing sentence: "Then, the fogcleared." ?

A. the weather had finally improved

B. a light had been turned on in theroom C. something bad had happened to

Martin D. Pratt had gained a new

understanding

44)) Which is the best antonymfor acumen?

A. distaste B. enlightenment C. inabilityD. uncertainty

55)) Which is the best antonymfor hesitant?

A. comfortable B. decisive C. relaxed D. trusting

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



66)) Which best explains why Prattdecided to get the money forMartin?

A. Pratt had the money to give. B. Pratt believed Martin was

innocent. C. Pratt had promised help many

years ago. D. Pratt feared Martin would hurt

him if he did not comply.

77)) Which best describes the Martin whoPratt remembers?

A. the smartest student he hadever had

B. a straight A student with no workethic

C. a gifted student with apropensity for trouble

D. a kid from a bad neighborhoodtrying to get out

88)) How does Pratt's mood change

from the beginning to end ofpassage?

A. from sleepy, to forgetful, togiving

B. from uncertain, to committed, toangry

C. from groggy, to clearheaded, toregretful

D. from proud, to reminiscent toambivalent

99)) What does the last line of this

passage seem to suggest?

A. that someone gets hurt B. that something bad happens C. that Martin's brother never

shows up D. that Martin spent a very long

time in jail

1100)) Which is the best antonym for irk?

A. exciteB. healC. humbleD. please

If you were Mr. Taylor, would you have bailed Pratt out? Why or why not?

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““BBBB”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


When I was about 12-years-old, my older brother, James, smuggleda BB gun into the house.

I’m not quite sure where he got it. This was in 1938, during the Grea t Depression.He must have bartered for it with one of his friends.

Having any form of weaponry in our home was strictly taboo.

James brought me to his room and took the BB gun out of a shoebox in hiscloset. I was immediately enamored. He let me touch it and walk with it around

the room. I fingered the trigger.

“Can I shoot it, Jamesie?” I asked, hopefully.

“No way,” James said, taking it from me and putting it back into its covert spot.

I forgot about it for a while, but one day, when no one was home, I went intoJames' closet and took it out.

For some unknown reason, I went to the front window of the second floor in ourrow house. I cracked the window open. I pointed the gun outside and shot. I

quickly shut the window and peeked outside.

In a matter of seconds, old Mr. Schlosberg came out of his grocery store. Helooked back at his store window. He looked up the street. He looked down thestreet. Then he looked straight across to our house. He could tell from thetrajectory just where that shot had come from. He knew someone in our housewas the culprit.

I ran back to James' room to return the gun and then sat downstairs, waitingnervously for someone to get home. Thankfully, Jamesie made it home beforeMother or Father.

As he stepped through the door, I could hear old Mr. Schlosberg call his name.

“James, James,” he called. “Come here, son.”

I crept to look out the door and saw Mr. Schlosberg pointing feverishly at ourhouse (up to the second floor window!) and then at his shop window. James ranback across the street and into the living room. I had retreated into the kitchen.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


“Alma!” he screamed. “Get out here! You cracked Mr. Schlosberg’s window withmy BB gun!”

“Oh, please, Jamesie,” I begged. “Don’t let him tell Mother. She will whip mybottom real good!”

Jamesie sighed. He wiped my tears and went back across the street to Mr.Schlosberg’s.

I don’t know what James said to that man, but there was never a mention of theincident again. I didn't know how I got out of it, but I got out of it, and that was allthat mattered to me then. I was too self-absorbed to realize what a great brother Ihad.

Years later, I found out Jamesie had used the money he got from his newspaperroute to pay for Mr. Schlosberg’s cracked window. He only got one cent for everypaper he delivered. He managed to pay the debt off just before he went off tofight in World War II.

Since that day, I have never touched a gun. A BB gun, a water gun, a real gun,or any other type.

Questions:

11)) Which is the best reason the authormay have included the detail of thisstory taking place during the GreatDepression?

A. to let the reader know how oldthe narrator is now

B. to let the reader know why gunswere taboo in the house

C. to let the reader know that WorldWar II had not occurred yet

D. to let the reader know howeconomically strained thingswere

22)) Which is the best antonymfor enamored?

A. bored

B. generous C. repulsed D. scared

33)) What does being “strictlytaboo” suggest?

A. It is illegal.B. It is forbidden. C. It is incomprehensible. D. Superstition surrounds it.

44)) What does it mean to put somethingin a covert place?

A. to put in the dark B. to put out of sight C. to put it in a secret place D. to put in a hard-to-find spot

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



55)) How did the incident seem to affect Alma?


A. □ It made her wary of guns.

B. □ It made her appreciative ofher brother.

C. □ It made her sure her brotherwould be a good soldier.

D. □ It made her trust her brothermore than her parents.

66)) A culprit is always...

A. guilty.B. nervous.

C. obedient. D. dangerous.

77)) Which is the best definitionfor trajectory?

A. a bullet holeB. a deep crackC. a path a projectile takesD. a sound a gun makes when

firing

88)) What did Alma seem most worriedabout?

A. getting caught by her brotherB. getting spanked by her motherC. having to pay for the broken

glassD. hiding the gun before her

parents got home

99)) What kind of brother does Jamesappear to be?

A. wealthyB. irrationalC. protectiveD. foolhardy

1100)) What kind of 12-year-old girl did Alma appear to be?

A. curious and selfishB. feisty and indignantC. humble and lovingD. reverent and respectful

Have you ever done something you regretted? Explain.

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


englishforeveryone.org Name________________

Date________________

BBeeggiinnnniinngg CCrriittiiccaall RReeaaddiinngg –– TThhee FFlluu

The flu is the common name for influenza. The flu is a respiratory sickness. The flu canbe mild. The flu can be bad. Sometimes the flu can even cause death. Each year in the U.S., 5% -

20% of people get the flu. Each year in the U.S., up to 60 million people get the flu. Each year in

the U.S., about 200,000 people go to the hospital because of the flu. Each year in the U.S., about36,000 people die from problems related to the flu.5

The flu is caused by a virus. A virus is a germ. People can spread the virus. The virus can

live in tiny drops of liquid. If you have the virus, you can spread it by coughing. You can get the

virus by touching a something that has the virus on it and then touching your eyes, nose, ormouth.

A flu shot can prevent the flu. The nasal flu mist can also prevent the flu. The shot and10

the nose spray are vaccines. Talk to your doctor about getting a vaccine. You can get information

about the flu shot and nasal spray from your local health department.If you get the flu, you might get a headache. You might have a fever. You might have a

cough and a runny nose. You might have a sore throat. You might feel very tired. Your bodymight hurt all over. Some people have diarrhea and vomiting.15

You can help stop the spread of the flu virus. The Centers for Disease Control remind

you to cover your cough. You should cough into a tissue and throw the tissue away. Or you can

cough into the inside of your elbow, into your own clothing. The Centers for Disease Controlalso remind you to clean your hands. You can use hand sanitizer. You should use an alcohol-

based hand sanitizer for the best results. You can use soap and water. You should wash your20

hands with warm water and soap for at least 20 seconds. Studies show that washing your handsfor 2 minutes with hot, soapy water is the best way to get the most germs off your hands. Be sure

to wash under your fingernails and between your fingers.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


QQuueessttiioonnss

11.. According to the passage, which of the following statements is/are true?

II)) At least 5% of the U.S. population gets the flu each year.

IIII))

There are three types of flu vaccine.

IIIIII))

Each year in the U.S., about 20% of people who have the flu die from it.

AA))

I only

BB))

II only

CC)) III only

DD))

I and II only

EE))

II and III only

22.. What is the main idea of the fifth paragraph?

AA)) How to wash your hands

BB))

How long to wash your handsCC)) How to stop the spread of the virus

DD)) What studies have shown about hand-washing

EE))

Why you should cough into your elbow

33.. In line 11, vaccine most closely means

AA)) nose

BB)) health

CC)) protection

DD)) shot

EE)) spray

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


AAnnsswweerrss aanndd EExxppllaannaattiioonnss

11.. The correct answer is A.

II))

Correct. Lines 2-3 state that “Each year in the U.S., 5% -20% of people get the flu.”

Therefore, the lowest percentage of people who gets the flu in the U.S. each year is5%. That means that at least 5% of the U.S. population gets the flu each year.

IIII))

Incorrect. Lines 10-11 state that “The shot and the nose spray are vaccines.” The flushot and the nose spray comprise two types of vaccine. While there may be three or

more types of vaccine, only two types of vaccine are mentioned in the passage.

IIIIII))

Incorrect. Line 3 states that “Each year in the U.S., up to 60 million people get the

flu.” Lines 4-5 state that “Each year in the U.S., about 36,000 people die fromproblems related to the flu.” Twelve million is 20% of 60 million. Since up to 60

million people in the U.S. have the flu each year, 12 million people in the U.S.

would be about 20% of the people in the U.S. who have the flu. Since about 36,000 people die from problems associated with the flu, the statement is not correct.

AA)) I only

BB)) II only

CC)) III only

DD)) I and II only

EE)) II and III only

22.. The correct answer is C.

AA))

Incorrect. While lines 20-23 state that “You should wash your hands with warm water

and soap for at least 20 seconds. Studies show that washing your hands for 2 minutes

with hot, soapy water is the best way to get the most germs off your hands. Be sure towash under your fingernails and between your fingers,” this procedure is outlined as a

recommendation of the Centers for Disease Control as a method of stopping the spread ofthe flu, not as the main idea of the paragraph.

BB)) Incorrect. While lines 20-23 state that “You should wash your hands with warm water

and soap for at least 20 seconds. Studies show that washing your hands for 2 minuteswith hot, soapy water is the best way to get the most germs off your hands,” this

procedure is outlined as a recommendation of the Centers for Disease Control as a

method of stopping the spread of the flu, not as the main idea of the paragraph.

CC))

Correct. Line 16 states that “You can help stop the spread of the flu virus.” The passagethen outlines methods of stopping the spread of the virus. These include coughing into a

tissue and throwing the tissue away (line 17), coughing into the inside of your elbow (line18), and cleaning your hands (line 19). The remainder of the paragraph outlines therecommended methods of cleaning your hands.

DD)) Incorrect. While lines 21-22 state that “Studies show that washing your hands for 2

minutes with hot, soapy water is the best way to get the most germs off your hands,” thepassage gives this information to support the main idea that you can help stop the spread

of the virus (line 16), and that one way of stopping the spread of the virus is by cleaning

your hands (line 19).

EE))

Incorrect. While lines 17-18 state “Or you can cough into the inside of your elbow, intoyour own clothing,” the reason for coughing into your elbow is not given.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



AA)) Incorrect. Lines 10-11 state that “The shot and the nose spray are vaccines.” Since the

nose spray is a vaccine, the word vaccine cannot mean nose.

BB)) Incorrect. Lines 10-11 state, “The flu shot can prevent the flu. The nasal flu mist can also

prevent the flu. The shot and the nose spray are vaccines. Talk to your doctor about

getting a vaccine.” Since the shot and the nose spray can prevent the flu, they are itemswhich can promote health. However, they are not health itself. Therefore, the vaccine is

not health itself, but a way of promoting good health.

CC)) Correct. Lines 10-11 state, “The flu shot can prevent the flu. The nasal flu mist can also

prevent the flu. The shot and the nose spray are vaccines.” Since the shot and the nasal

flu mist can both prevent the flu, and both the shot and the nasal flu mist are vaccines, it

stands to reason that the vaccine can protect against the flu. Therefore, the vaccine is aform of protection from the flu.

DD)) Incorrect. Line 11 states that “The shot and the nose spray are vaccines.” While the shot

is one type of vaccine, it is not the only vaccine, and there is no statement in the text that

all shots are vaccines.

EE)) Incorrect. Line 11 states that “The shot and the nose spray are vaccines.” While the spray is one type of vaccine, it is not the only vaccine, and there is no statement in the text that

all sprays are vaccines.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

BBeeggiinnnniinngg CCrriittiiccaall RReeaaddiinngg –– NNuuttss There is a small difference between nuts and seeds. Many seeds often are called nuts. For

example, hazelnuts are nuts. Chestnuts are nuts. Beechnuts are nuts. Acorns are nuts. But, Brazil

Nuts are not nuts. Cashews are not nuts. Peanuts are not nuts. Pistachios are not nuts.So what are nuts? A true nut is a fruit with one seed. True nuts have very hard shells.True nuts do not open on their own. You must crack a true nut to open it.5

Cooks often call seeds “nuts.” In addition, English speakers often call seeds, “nuts.” The

difference between nuts and seeds is small, so it is not necessarily wrong to call a seed a nut.Nuts are good for your health. Seeds are also good for your health. Nuts and seeds

contain a lot of oil. They also contain a lot of energy for your body. Nuts are a good snack food.

Seeds are also a good snack food. Nuts are good for the heart. Seeds are also good for the heart.10Nuts help you grow. Seeds also help you grow. Nuts are good for the skin. Seeds are also good

for the skin.

Many animals eat nuts. Squirrels eat nuts. Mice eat nuts. Chipmunks eat nuts. Raccoonseat nuts. Birds eat nuts. Even some dogs eat nuts.

Many animals eat seeds. Birds eat seeds. Mice eat seeds. Even some snakes eat seeds.15

There are hundreds of nuts that people and animals can eat. There are hundreds of seeds

that people and animals can eat. But many nuts and seeds are inedible. Look in a book or checkon the internet before trying to eat unfamiliar seeds and nuts. Learn if new foods are safe and

healthful by reading about them before tasting them.

QQuueessttiioonnss


II)) Cashews are true nuts.

IIII))

A nut is a fruit.IIIIII))

True nuts do not open naturally.

AA))

I only

BB)) II only

CC))

III only

DD))

I and II only


22.. What is the main idea of the third paragraph?

AA))

Many cooks do not understand what nuts are.

BB))

In normal speech, some seeds are called nuts.

CC))

Seeds are nuts, but nuts are not seeds.

DD)) Nuts and seeds are small.

EE))

The English language uses the wrong words for seeds.

33.. In line 17, inedible most closely means

AA)) familiar

BB)) not good for health

CC)) not able to be eaten

DD)) unbelievable

EE)) safe to eat

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



11.. The correct answer is E.

II)) Incorrect. Line 3 states that “Cashew nuts are not nuts.”

IIII)) Correct. Line 4 states that “A true nut is a fruit with one seed.”

IIIIII))

Correct. Line 5 states that “True nuts do not open on their own.” Since they do notopen on their own, they do not open naturally.

AA)) I only

BB)) II only

CC)) III only

DD)) I and II only


22.. The correct answer is B.

AA)) Incorrect. While line 6 states that “Cooks often call seeds “nuts,” it does not state that

cooks do not understand what nuts are. It is a statement of language use, not a statementof knowledge. Since it is an incorrect interpretation of the sentence, it is not the main

idea of the paragraph.

BB))

Correct. Line 6 states that “…English speakers often call seeds, “nuts.”

CC))

Incorrect. Lines 6-7 state that “difference between nuts and seeds is small.” There is

nothing which says that seeds are nuts. So this cannot be the main idea of the

paragraph.

DD))

Incorrect. While it may be true that most nuts and seeds are small, the sentence in lines 6-7 actually states that the difference between nuts and seeds is small. So this is not the

main idea of the paragraph.

EE))

Incorrect. Lines 6-7 state that “In addition, English speakers often call seeds, “nuts.” The

difference between nuts and seeds is small, so it is not necessarily wrong to call a seed anut.”


AA)) Incorrect. Since the following sentence (lines 17-18) reminds readers to “Look in a book

or check on the internet before trying to eat unfamiliar seeds and nuts.” If the seeds andnuts are unfamiliar , they cannot be familiar. So the word inedible cannot mean

familiar .

BB)) Incorrect. Lines 18-19 remind readers to “Learn if new foods are safe and healthful …”To learn if foods are healthful means to learn whether foods are good for health.

Checking whether they are good for health means that it is unknown whether the food isgood for health or not.

CC)) Correct. Inedible food is food that is unable to be eaten.

DD)) Incorrect. The word inedible is similar to the word “incredible,” which means

unbelievable. The word incredible is not used in this reading passage.

EE)) Incorrect. Lines 18-19 remind readers to “Learn if new foods are safe and healthful …”To learn if foods are safe means that it is unknown whether the foods are safe or not. So

the word inedible cannot mean safe.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

BBeeggiinnnniinngg CCrriittiiccaall RReeaaddiinngg –– PPaappeerr

Paper has many uses. People draw on paper. People paint on paper. People write on

paper. People clean with paper. People make boxes out of paper. People blow their noses on

paper. Books are made of paper. Magazines are made of paper. Some money is printed on paper.Sandpaper is made of paper. Wallpaper is made of paper.

Some paper is made from plants. Some paper is made from cotton. Some paper is made5

from bamboo. Some paper is made from wheat. Most paper is made from trees. 95% of paper is

made from trees. Some paper is made from pine trees. Some paper is made from oak trees. Somepaper is made from maple trees. Some paper is recycled. When paper is recycled, new paper is

made from old paper.

Some people say they work in paper-free offices. Some people think computers will take10away the need for paper. But people will always need to blow their noses. People will want to

sand surfaces with sandpaper. People will want to paint or draw on paper. People will want to

put things in paper boxes. So, people will probably need to use paper for many more years.

QQuueessttiioonnss


II)) Ninety-five percent of paper is made from pine trees.

IIII))

Computers will take away the need for paper.

IIIIII))

There will probably always be uses for paper.

AA))

I onlyBB))

II only

CC))

III only

DD)) I and II only

EE))

II and III only

22.. What is the main idea of the second paragraph?

AA)) What is made of paper

BB))

What paper is made of

CC))

What people think of paper

DD)) The many uses of paper

EE))

The future of paper

33.. In line 12, sand most closely means

AA)) grainy mineral

BB)) paint or color

CC)) polish or smooth

DD)) use for storage

EE)) draw

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




II)) Incorrect. According to line 7, “Ninety–five percent of paper is made from trees.

Some paper is made from pine trees.”IIII))

Incorrect. According to lines 10-11, “Some people think computers will take awaythe need for paper.” So while it might be true that computers will take away the

need for paper, the passage states that it is some people’s opinion, not a fact .

IIIIII))

Correct. According to lines 13-14, “People will probably always need to use paper.”

AA)) I only

BB)) II only

CC)) III only

DD)) I and II only



AA)) Incorrect. The second paragraph tells what paper is made of . For example, according to

line 5, “Some paper is made from plants. Some paper is made from cotton.” The first

paragraph tells what is made of paper . According to lines 3-4, “Books are made of paper.

Magazines are made of paper.”

BB)) Correct. The second paragraph tells what paper is made of . For example, according to

line 5, “Some paper is made from plants. Some paper is made from cotton.”

CC))

Incorrect. The second paragraph tells what paper is made of . For example, according toline 5, “Some paper is made from plants. Some paper is made from cotton.” The third

paragraph contains some information about what people think . For example, according

to lines 10-11, “Some people think computers will take away the need for paper.”DD)) Incorrect. The second paragraph tells what paper is made of . For example, according to

line 5, “Some paper is made from plants. Some paper is made from cotton.” The first

paragraph tells about the many uses of paper . For example, according to line 1, “Paperhas many uses. People draw on paper. People paint on paper.”

EE)) Incorrect. The second paragraph tells what paper is made of . For example, according to

line 5, “Some paper is made from plants. Some paper is made from cotton.” The third

paragraph discusses the future of paper . For example, according to lines 10-11, “Somepeople think computers will take away the need for paper. But people will always need to

blow their noses.”


AA)) Incorrect. In lines 11–12, the word sand is used as a verb. According to the passage,

“Some people will want to sand surfaces with sandpaper.” While the word sand doessometimes refer to a mineral, that usage of sand is a noun, not a verb. So in this case,

the word sand cannot mean a grainy mineral.

BB)) Incorrect. While it is true that people paint or color on surfaces and that there is a

reddish–brown color which is called sand , paint or color is probably not the meaning of

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


sand as it is used in this line, because the following sentence states that “Some peoplewill want to paint or draw on paper.”

CC)) Correct. The meaning of sand in this sentence is to smooth or polish. Since sandpaper

has a rainy surface, it smoothes or polishes other surfaces when it is rubbed against them.

DD)) Incorrect. Since the third paragraph contains a listing of possible future uses of paper,

storage does appear as one of the possible uses. However, it appears in line 13 – “Some

people will want to put things in paper boxes.” Since putting things in boxes is storingthings, this is the sentence where storage is listed. So it is unlikely that sand means use

for storage.

EE)) Incorrect. Since the third paragraph is a listing of possible future uses of paper,

drawing on paper does appear as one of the possible future uses. However it is used in

lines 13-14, “Some people will want to paint or draw on paper.” So sand probably does

not refer to drawing.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

BBeeggiinnnniinngg CCrriittiiccaall RReeaaddiinngg –– SSooaappss aanndd DDeetteerrggeennttss

Soaps and detergents are used for washing. Soaps and detergents are used for cleaning.

People usually use detergent to wash clothes. People usually use detergent to wash dishes.

People usually use soap to wash their bodies.Soap has a long history. There was soap in Ancient Babylon. There was soap in Ancient

Egypt. Some people think there was soap before people wrote history.5

Soap and detergent are similar, but soap and detergent are not exactly the same. Soaps are

made of natural products. Detergents are made of man-made products.In some cases, soap is better than detergent. For example, soap is milder on the skin.

Soap is milder on the environment. Soap is biodegradable – nature’s processes clean soap up.

Soap does not build up in rivers. Soap does not cause pollution in rivers. Soap does not build up10in streams. Soap does not cause pollution in streams.

In some cases, detergent is better than soap. For example, soap builds up in clothes after

many washings. Detergent does not build up in clothes after many washings. Soap loses itscleaning power in clothes over time. Detergent does not lose its cleaning power in clothes over

time.15

QQuueessttiioonnss


II))

Soap is made of natural or man-made products.

IIII)) Detergents are less mild than soaps.

IIIIII)) Detergent washes out of clothing.

IIVV))

AA)) I only

BB))

II only

CC)) III only

DD)) I and II only

EE))

II and III only

22.. What is the main idea of the fifth paragraph?

AA)) How soaps and detergents are made

BB)) What soap and detergent are used for

CC))

Which product causes less pollutionDD)) How soap loses its cleaning power

EE)) When detergent is better than soap

33.. In line 9, biodegradable most closely means

AA)) man-made

BB)) dangerous

CC)) permanent

DD)) easy to clean up

EE)) hard to clean up

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




II)) Incorrect. Line 7 states that “Soaps are made of natural products. Detergents are

made of man-made products.”IIII))

Correct. Lines 8-9 state that “For example, soap is milder on the skin. Soap ismilder on the environment.” Since soap is milder than detergent, detergent is less

mild than soap.

IIIIII))

Correct. Line 14 states that “Detergent does not build up in clothes after many

washings.” Since detergent does not build up, or stay, in clothing, it must wash out.

AA)) I only

BB)) II only

CC)) III only

DD)) I and II only



AA)) Incorrect. Line 7 in the third paragraph explains how soap and detergent are made of

different products, when it states that “Soaps are made of natural products. Detergents are

made of man-made products,” the fifth paragraph gives examples of ways in whichdetergent is sometimes better than soap. For example, the fifth paragraph states that

“Soap loses its cleaning power in clothes over time. Detergent does not lose its cleaning

power in clothes over time.”

BB)) Incorrect. While lines 1-2 explain the uses of soaps and detergents when they state that

“Soaps and detergents are used for washing. Soaps and detergents are used for cleaning,”

the fifth paragraph gives examples of ways in which detergent is sometimes better thansoap. For example, the fifth paragraph states that “Soap loses its cleaning power in

clothes over time. Detergent does not lose its cleaning power in clothes over time.”

CC))

Incorrect. While lines 9-11 explain that soap causes less pollution when they state that“Soap is milder on the environment. Soap is biodegradable – nature’s processes clean

soap up. Soap does not build up in rivers. Soap does not cause pollution in rivers. Soap

does not build up in streams. Soap does not cause pollution in streams,” the fifth

paragraph gives examples of ways in which detergent is sometimes better than soap. Forexample, the fifth paragraph states that “Soap loses its cleaning power in clothes over

time. Detergent does not lose its cleaning power in clothes over time.”

DD))

Incorrect. While line 14 states that “Soap loses its cleaning power in clothes over time,” it

does not tell how soap loses its cleaning power.EE)) Correct. The fifth paragraph gives examples of ways in which detergent is sometimes

better than soap. For example, the fifth paragraph states that “Soap loses its cleaningpower in clothes over time. Detergent does not lose its cleaning power in clothes over

time.”

33.. The correct answer is D.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


AA)) Incorrect. Since line 7 states that “Soaps are made of natural products,” and line 9 statesthat “Soap is biodegradable,” the word biodegradable cannot mean man-made.

BB)) Incorrect. Since lines 8-9 state that “soap is milder on the skin. Soap is milder on the

environment,” and line 9 states that “Soap is biodegradable,” the word biodegradable

cannot mean dangerous.

CC)) Incorrect. Since lines 9-10 state that “nature’s processes clean soap up,” the word

biodegradable cannot mean permanent .DD)) Correct. Since lines 9-10 state that “nature’s processes clean soap up,” the word

biodegradable probably means easy to clean up.

EE)) Incorrect. Since lines 9-10 state that “nature’s processes clean soap up,” the word

biodegradable probably doesn’t mean hard to clean up.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

BBeeggiinnnniinngg CCrriittiiccaall RReeaaddiinngg –– TThhee SSuunn

The sun is a star. The sun is at the center of the solar system. The sun is the largest object

in the solar system. It is more than 99.8% of the mass of the solar system. More than one million

earths could fit inside the sun!From earth, the sun looks like a yellow ball in the sky. A long time ago, people didn’t

know what the sun was. Many people told stories about the sun. People in many countries told5

stories about the sun. In some stories, people said the sun was a god. Some people gave names tothe sun. The Greeks named it Helios. The Romans named it Sol. The name Solar System comes

from the Roman name Sol.

The sun is very hot. On the surface, it is about 5,510 ° Celsius. That’s equal to about

11,000 ° Fahrenheit. The inside of the sun is even hotter. The core of the sun is 15,000,000 °C!10That’s 27,000,000 °F!

The light from the sun is very bright. People must not look directly at the sun. Looking

directly at the sun will hurt your eyes.People need the sun’s heat and light to live. Animals need the sun’s heat and light to live.

Plants need the sun’s heat and light to live. Plants make food with sunlight. People and animals15

eat the plants. Plants also use the sun to make oxygen. People and animals need to breatheoxygen.

Today people do not tell stories about the sun. Today people do not think the sun is a god.

But, people know that the sun is necessary for life on earth.

20

QQuueessttiioonnss


II))

The sun is over a million times brighter than the earth.

IIII))

Some people used to think the sun was a god.IIIIII)) The sun’s surface is cooler than its core.

AA)) I only

BB)) II only

CC))

III only

DD))

I and II only


22.. The main idea of the second paragraph is to explain

AA)) what the sun is.

BB))

what the sun looks like.

CC))

how people reacted to the sun.DD)) who the Greeks and Romans were.

EE))

who did not know what the sun was.

33.. In line 10, core most closely means

AA)) center

BB)) gas

CC)) oxygen

DD)) surface

EE)) temperature

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




II))

Incorrect. While lines 2-3 state that more than a million earths could fit inside the

sun, there is no mention there that the sun is a million times brighter than the earth.And while line 12 states that the light from the sun is very bright, it does not

compare the brightness of the sun to the brightness of the earth. So while the sun

may be a million times brighter than the earth, there is no such statement in thepassage.

IIII))

Correct. Line 6 states that in some stories, people said the sun was a god.

IIIIII))

Correct. Lines 9-11 state that the surface temperature is 5510 °C or 11,000 °F,whereas the core, or inside of the sun is 15,000,000 °C or 27,000,000 °F. So the

surface of the sun is much cooler than its core.

AA)) I only

BB)) II onlyCC)) III only

DD)) I and II only



AA))

Incorrect. While lines 4-5 state that a long time ago, people didn’t know what the sunwas, there is no explanation in paragraph 2 of what the sun is.

BB)) Incorrect. While line 4 states that from earth, the sun looks like a yellow ball in the sky,

this information is given only as background information, not as the main idea of theparagraph.

CC))

Correct. The first sentence of the paragraph tells what the sun looks like. The remainderof the paragraph tells about people’s reactions to the sun – that they didn’t know what it

was, that they told stories about it; also that some people thought it was a god, and thatsome people named it.

DD))

Incorrect. While line 6 states “The Greeks named it Helios. The Romans named it Sol,”

there is no explanation of who the Greeks and Romans were.

EE)) Incorrect. While lines 4-5 state that a long time ago, people did not know what the sun

was, there is no mention of the specific people who did not know what it was. While

lines 6-7 state that the Greeks and Romans gave names to the sun, the passage does not specify that they did not know what the sun was.

33.. The correct answer is A.

AA)) Correct. Lines 9 and 10 compare the surface temperature of the sun with the temperature

of its core: “The inside of the sun is even hotter. The core of the sun is 15,000,000 °C!”

BB)) Incorrect. While the sun is made of gas, in this passage, the gas is not mentioned.Instead, this section compares the surface of the sun to the core of the sun. Since both the

surface and the core would be made of the same material, the meaning gas would not

make sense for the word core.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


CC)) Incorrect. Lines 9 and 10 compare the surface temperature of the sun with thetemperature of its core. Lines 16-17 state that plants use sunlight to make oxygen, not

that the sun itself is made of oxygen.

DD)) Incorrect. Lines 9-10 compare the temperature of the surface of the sun with the

temperature of the core. Since the comparison is made between the surface and the core,

the word core could not mean surface.

EE)) Incorrect. Lines 9-10 compare the heat level (which is the temperature) of the surface of

the sun with the heat level of the core of the sun. Since the comparison is being made of

the temperature of the surface and the temperature of the core, the word core could not

mean temperature.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

BBeeggiinnnniinngg CCrriittiiccaall RReeaaddiinngg -- WWaatteerr

Water is the most common liquid in the world. Lakes contain water. Rivers contain

water. Ponds contain water. Canals contain water. Oceans contain water. The water in rivers,

ponds, and canals is fresh water. The water in oceans is salt water.About 70% of the world is covered by water. About 97% of water in the world is salt

water. Only 3% of the world’s water is fresh water. Fresh water is not salty.5

People usually think of water as a liquid. But water freezes to form a solid. The solid is

called ice. And water boils to form a gas. The gas is called steam or vapor.Clouds are made of water. Water falls from clouds as rain. When it is cold, water falls as

snow. Sometimes water falls as sleet. Sleet is partly water and partly ice. Sometimes water falls

as hail. Hail is ice.10People need water to live. Animals need water to live. Insects need water to live. Plants

need water to live. All living things in the world need water to live.

People all over the world need to drink clean water to live. About one billion people inthe world do not have clean drinking water. The largest cause of preventable human death in the

world is drinking water that is unsanitary.15

QQuueessttiioonnss


II)) Ninety-seven percent of snow is made of salt water.

IIII)) The largest cause of preventable human death is drinking water that is unsanitary..

IIIIII))

About 1,000,000,000 people in the world do not have clean water to drink.

AA)) I only

BB))

II only

CC)) III only

DD)) I and II only

EE))

II and III only

22.. What is the main idea of the first paragraph?

AA)) Fresh water is necessary for life.

BB)) Most water in the world is salt water.

CC))

Water is the most common liquid in the world.DD)) People cannot drink most of the world’s water.

EE)) Only 3% of the world’s water is not salt water.

33.. In line 15, unsanitary most closely means

AA)) not available

BB)) not clean

CC)) not in liquid form

DD)) used for another purpose

EE)) salty

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




II)) Incorrect. While line 3 states that 97% of the world’s water is salty, there is no

information in the passage concerning the amount of salt, if any, in snow.IIII))

Correct. Lines 13-14 state that the largest cause of preventable human death isdrinking water that is unsanitary. Unsanitary means not clean.

IIIIII)) Correct. Lines 12-13 state that one billion people in the world do not have clean

drinking water. One billion is the written form of the number 1,000,000,000.

AA)) I only

BB)) II only

CC)) III only

DD)) I and II only



AA)) Incorrect. While the last paragraph states that water is necessary for life, this information

is not given in the first paragraph.

BB))

Incorrect. While line 3 states that most of the world’s water is salt water, this is not the

main idea of the paragraph.

CC)) Correct. The first sentence of the paragraph states that water is the most common liquid

in the world. Lines 2-4 expand that idea. Therefore, it is the main idea of the paragraph.

DD))

Incorrect. While it is true that people do not drink salt water, and it is true that 97% of theworld’s water is saltwater, as stated in line 3, this information is not stated in paragraph

1.

EE))

Incorrect. While lines 3-4 state that only 3% of the world’s water is not salty, thisinformation is given as support for the main idea – that water is the most common liquid

in the world.


AA)) Incorrect. While it is possible that water is not available to people in many places in the

world because only 3% of the world’s water is not salty, there is no mention in thepassage that water is not available.

BB)) Correct. Unsanitary water is not clean.

CC)) Incorrect. While lines 5-9 give information about water that is not in liquid form, there is

no mention that these forms of water would cause death.DD)) Incorrect. Although it is true that water is used for many purposes other than drinking,

there is no mention of these purposes in the passage.

EE)) Incorrect. While lines 2-4 discuss salt water, and while drinking salt water may cause

death, there is no mention in the passage that salt water causes death.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

Beginning Dialogues – “Country Life City Life”

Henry: Hi Henry! How is life in the country?

Davie: Hey Davie. Life in the country is fine. How is life in the city?

Henry: It’s great. I love the trees, flowers, birds, and insects.

Davie: Insects!? Eww, that’s gross.

Henry: Well, how is life in the city?

Davie: It’s great. I love the buildings, cars, streets, and bright lights.

Henry: Bright lights!? I hate bright lights!

Davie: Yeah but in the city I can take the subway to work. I don’t even have to drive.

Henry: That’s nice. But, in the country I work on a farm near my house so I don’t have to

drive either. I walk to work.

Davie: Doesn’t that hurt your feet?

Henry: Sometimes, but its worth it because I get to eat food the comes straight from the

farm.

Davie: Mmmm, food from the farm sounds good. I wonder if it is better than the food

you can eat at restaurants in the city!

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Questions:

1) Who lives in the city?

A.

HenryB.

Davie

C. Both Henry and DavieD.

Neither Henry nor Davie

2) What does Davie think is gross?

A.

Birds

B. Insects

C. FlowersD.

Trees

3) What does Henry hate?

A.

Buildings

B.

Cars

C. Streets

D. Bright lights

4) How does Davie get to work?

A. She drives a carB.

She takes the bus

C.

She takes the subway

D. None of the above

5) How does Henry get to work?

A. He drives a tractor

B. He rides a horseC.

He drives a lawn mower


Vocabulary:

1) If something is gross, it is…

A.

tasty.B.

disgusting.

C. ready.D.

A and B.

2) If a light is bright, it is…

A. dark.B.

low.

C. strong.

D. none of the above.

3) When Henry says, “I don’t have to

drive either,” he means that…

A.

he likes to drive.

B. he also has to drive to work.

C. he also does not have to drive towork.


4) If an action is worth it…

A. the value of doing that action ishigh enough.

B.

the action has no value.

C. the action is old.

D. the action is boring.

5) When you wonder, you…

A.

play.

B. think.

C.

imagine.D.

B and C.

E.

None of the above.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

Beginning Dialogues – “How are You”

Julia: Hi Anita. How are you?

Anita: I am fine, thanks. How are you?

Julia: I feel bad. I think I am sick.

Anita: Hmm, that is not good.

Julia: Yes, I know.

Anita: Well, I think you should try to relax.

Julia: Okay.

Anita: I hope you feel better soon.

Julia: Yeah, I do too!

Questions:

1) How does Julia feel?

A. Good

B. Bad

C. Sick

D. B and C

2) What does Anita think Julia shoulddo?

A. Exercise

B. Eat something

C. Drink something

D. Relax

Vocabulary:

1) Relax means ______________.

A. exercise.

B. rest.

C. study.


2) Soon is __________________.

A. now.

B. a long time from now.

C.

a short time from now.

D. never.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

Beginning Dialogues – “Tie Your Shoes!”

Dad: Tie your shoes!

Michael: Okay, Dad. I will.

Mom: Tuck in your shirt!

Michael Okay, Mom. I will.

Sister: Empty the trash!

Michael: Okay, Sis. I will.

Grandmother: Make your bed!

Michael: Okay, Grandma. I will.

Grandfather: Do your homework!

Michael: Okay, Grandpa. I will. Hey, Little Brother!

Little Brother: Me?

Michael: Yes, you! Tie your shoes!

Questions:

1) What does Mom want Michael to do?

A.

Tie his shoes

B. Make his bed

C. Tuck in his shirt

D. Do his homework

2) Who is probably the youngest person?

A. Michael

B.

SisterC. Little Brother

D. Grandma

Vocabulary:

1) Tuck in your shirt means…

A.

put the bottom of your shirt inside

your pants.

B. button the top of your shirt around

your neck.

C. wear a clean shirt.

D. fold your shirt.

2) When something is empty, it …

A. is full.

B. has nothing in it.

C. is heavy.


7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

Beginning Dialogues – “What time is it?”

Julio: Hey Yoko. Do you know what time it is?

Yoko: No, sorry. Ask Bob.

Julio: Hey Bob. Do you know what time it is?

Bob: No man, sorry. Ask Roger.

Julio: Okay. Hey Roger, do you know what time it is?

Roger: Well, I did this morning, but then I forgot. Sorry. Ask Lola.

Julio: Okay, fine. Hey Lola, what time is it?

Lola: I do not know. That is a good question. Let me know if you find out please.

Julio: Gosh! Does anybody know what time it is?

Questions:

1) What time is it?

A. 10:30

B. 11:00

C. Nobody knows

D. Noon

2) How many people are in this story?

A. Two

B. Three

C. Four

D. Five

Vocabulary:

1) If you ask someone, you _________.

A. question someone.

B. answer someone.

C. A and B.


2) Roger forgot the time. So, Roger

__________ the time now.

A. knows

B. used to know

C. does not know

D. B and C

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

Beginning Dialogues – “Where Are My Glasses?”

Ahmad: I can’t find my glasses.

Uli: Have you looked on the kitchen table?

Ahmad: Yes, I’ve looked there.

Uli: Have you checked your desk?

Ahmad: Yes, I’ve checked there.

Uli: Have you looked next to the computer?

Ahmad: They’re not there.

Mo: Hi Dad.

Ahmad: Hi Mo. I’m looking for my glasses.

Mo: Have you checked on top of your head?

Ahmad: Oh! There they are!

Questions:

1) What is Ahmad doing?

A. Looking for his checks

B. Working in the kitchen

C. Looking for his glasses

D. Working at his desk

2) Who is Mo?

A. Ahmad’s dad

B. Ahmad’s son

C.

Uli’s friend

D. Uli’s dad

Vocabulary:

1) Uli asks if Ahmad has checked his

desk. Checked means…

A. helped out.

B. cleaned up.

C.

worked on.

D. looked over.

2) Another way of saying next to is…

A. under.

B. above.

C.

beside.D. between.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

Beginning Dialogues – “Where are my keys?”

Vanka: Hey Oni, do you know where my pen is?

Oni: Yes, it is on your desk.

Vanka: Okay thanks. Hey Roger, do you know where my hat is?

Roger: Yeah, it is on your bed.

Vanka: Okay thanks. Hey Dillan, do you know where my purse is?

Dillan: Yeah, it is on the couch.

Vanka: Okay thanks. Hey Jonas, do you know where my belt is?

Jonas: Yeah, it is in your room.

Vanka: Okay thanks. Now I have everything I need. Now I can go to work.

Oni: Hey Vanka, do you know where your car keys are?

Vanka: No. Where are they? I need them!

Questions:

1) Where is Vanka’s purse?

A. On her bed

B. On the couch

C. In her room


2) What is the last thing Vanka needs?

A. Her pen

B. Her hat

C. Her purse

D. Her belt

E. Her keys

Vocabulary:

1) Yeah and ______ mean the same

thing.

A. no

B. please

C. yes

D. A and B.

2) If Vanka has everything she needs,

she has…

A. all of the things she needs.

B. none of the things she needs.

C. almost all of the things she needs.


7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

Beginning Forming Questions – “To do”

Directions: Use the words on the left to form questions.

_______________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

Beginning Forming Questions – “How”


_______________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

Beginning Forming Questions – “To be”


7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

Beginning Forming Questions – “What”


_______________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

Beginning Forming Questions – “When”


_______________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

Beginning Forming Questions – “Where”


_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

Beginning Forming Questions – “Who”


_______________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

Beginning Forming Questions – “Why”


_______________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

Beginning Matching – Animals Part 1

Directions: Draw a line from words to their pictures.

A) bird

B) fish

C) dog

D) cat

E) lion

F) bear

G) horse

H) elephant

I) tiger

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)

7)

8)

9)

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________



A) butterfly

B) dolphin

C) fox

D) goose

E) koala

F) owl

G) rabbit

H) shark

I) wolf

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)

7)

8)

9)

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________



A) alligator

B) camel

C) giraffe

D) kangaroo

E) lizard

F) penguin

G) whale

H) zebra

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)

7)

8)

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

Beginning Matching – Clothing


A) shirt

B) pants

C) jacket

D) tie

E) dress

F) shoes

G) belt

H) suit

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)

7)

8)

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

Beginning Matching – Cooking


A) fork

B) spoon

C) knife

D) pot

E) pan

F) refrigerator

G) microwave

H) plate

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)

7)

8)

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

Beginning Matching – Food Part 2Directions: Draw a line from words to their pictures.

A) bell pepper

B) broccoli

C) potatoes

D) squash

E) cucumbers

F) cheese

G) tomato

H) eggs

I) corn

J) mushrooms

K) strawberry

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)

7)

8)

9)

10)

11)

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

Beginning Matching – Food


A) apple

B) orange

C) grapes

D) fish

E) chicken

F) beans

G) peppers

H) bread

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)

7)

8)

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

Beginning Matching – Furniture


A) table

B) chair

C) bookcase

D) sofa

E) dresser

F) recliner

G) bed

H) desk

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)

7)

8)

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

Beginning Matching – Household ToolsDirections: Draw a line from words to their pictures.

A) shaver

B) tweezers

C) nail clipper

D) compass

E) can opener

F) goggles

G) utility knife

H) level

I) duct tape

J) paintbrush

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)

7)

8)

9)

10)

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

Beginning Matching – School Tools


A) pen

B) pencil

C) ruler

D) highlighter

E) calculator

F) scissors

G) glue

H) tape

I) books

J) markers

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)

7)

8)

9)

10)

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

Beginning Matching – The Human Body

Part 2Directions: Draw a line from words to their pictures.

A) tongue

B) teeth

C) heel

D) toes

E) finger

F) elbow

G) knee

H) shoulders

I) hair

J) chin

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)

7)

8)

9)

10)

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

Beginning Matching – The Human BodyDirections: Draw a line from words to their pictures.

A) legs

B) neck

C) arm

D) ear

E) eye

F) foot

G) hands

H) lips

I) nose

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)

7)

8)

9)

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

Beginning Matching – Construction Tools


A) tape measure

B) nail

C) hammer

D) screwdriver

E) wrench

F) drill

G) pliers

H) saw

I) circular saw

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)

7)

8)

9)

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

Beginning Short Stories – “My Family”

Directions: First read the basic version of the story below. Next, read the advanced

version of the same story. Then, try to answer the questions about the story.

Basic Version

Hi, my name is Eric. I want to tell you about my family.

I have two sisters. They are very nice. Their names are Rachel and Norma. Rachelis younger than me. She is twelve years old. Norma is older than me. She is eighteen.

My mother is very pretty. Her name is Adel. She has a very good memory. She

can remember all the names of the presidents of the United States.

My father knows about very many things. He is an engineer. He builds bridges.

We also have a dog in our family. His name is Paw. He is a German Shepard. He

is very faithful to us.

Advanced Version

Hi, my name is Eric. I want to tell you about my family.

I have two sisters. They are very nice. Their names are Rachel and Norma. Rachel

is younger than me. She is twelve years old. Norma is older than me. She is eighteen.

My mother is beautiful . Her name is Adel. She has a great memory. She can

remember all the names of the presidents of the United States.

My father is smart. He is an engineer. He builds bridges.

We also have a dog in our family. His name is Paw. He is a German Shepard. He

is very loyal .

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Questions:

1. How old is Norma?

2. What can Adel remember?

3. What is the job of the father?

4. What kind of dog is Paw?

Vocabulary:

To find word definitions: First, find the word in the advanced version of the story. Then,

compare this part of the advanced version of the story to the same part of the basic

version of the story. This will give you a general definition of the word.

1. What does “ beautiful ” mean? (paragraph 3, sentence 1)

2. What does “ great” mean? (paragraph 3, sentence 3)

3. What does “ smart” mean? (paragraph 4, sentence 1)

4.

What does “loyal ” mean? (paragraph 4, sentence 4)

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

Beginning Short Stories – “An Adventure”



Basic Version

Jamie has a dog named Gogo.

Jamie and Gogo are bored. They want to do something new. They want to do something

fun. They want to do something exciting.

Jamie and Gogo walk out of the house. They walk across the yard. They walk across the

field. They jump over the fence.

Jaime sees a mountain. The mountain is very tall. The top of the mountain is in the

clouds. Jaime looks at the mountain.

“We are going to the top of that mountain,” Jaime says.

Gogo looks scared.

“Do not be scared,” Jamie says.

Gogo runs after Jaime. They walk toward the mountain. Jaime stops. He looks back at

their home.

“I am a little tired,” Jaime says to Gogo. Gogo puts his tongue across Jaime’s face. Jaime

turns around and starts walking home.

“Come on Gogo. We will climb the mountain tomorrow,” Jaime says.

Advanced Version

Jamie has a dog named Gogo.

Jamie and Gogo are bored. They want go on an adventure.

Jamie and Gogo walk out of the house. They walk across the yard. They walk across the

field. They jump over the fence.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Jaime sees a mountain. The mountain is very tall. The top of the mountain is in the

clouds. Jaime looks at the mountain.

“We’re going to the top of that mountain,” Jaime says.

Gogo looks scared.

“Don’t be scared,” Jamie says.

Gogo follows Jaime. They walk toward the mountain. Jaime stops. He looks back at their

home.

“I am kind of tired,” Jaime says to Gogo. Gogo licks Jaime’s face. Jaime turns around

and starts walking home.

“C’mon Gogo. We’ll climb the mountain tomorrow,” Jaime says.

Questions:

1. Where does Jaime want to go?

2. Where does Jaime go?

Vocabulary:




1. What does “ adventure” mean? ( line 2)

2. What does “ follow” mean? ( paragraph 8)

3. What does “ kind of ” mean? ( paragraph 9)

4. What does “lick” mean? (paragraph 9)

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

Beginning Short Stories – “Happy Birthday”



Basic Version

“Happy birthday to you. Happy birthday to you. Happy birthday dear Jose. Happy

birthday to you!” the people at the party sang.

Jose smiled and blew out the candles.

“How old are you Jose?” Jessie asked.

“I am 29” Jose answered.

“Wait, are you telling the truth?” Jessie asked.

“Yes, I am telling the truth. I am 29 years old.” Jose answered.

“No he is not! He is 30!” someone said in a loud voice.

“How do you know?” Jessie asked.

“Because I am his mother!” she answered.

Advanced Version

“Happy birthday to you. Happy birthday to you. Happy birthday dear Jose. Happy

birthday to you!” the people at the party sang.

Jose smiled and blew out the candles.

“How old are you Jose?” Jessie asked.

“I am 29” Jose replied .

“Wait, are you telling the truth?” Jessie asked.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


“Yes, I am telling the truth. I am 29 years old.” Jose replied .

“No he is not! He is 30!” someone shouted .

“How do you know?” Jessie asked.

“Because I am his mother!” she replied .

Questions:

1. How old is Jose?

2. How does the woman know the age of Jose?

Vocabulary:




1.

What does “ replied ” mean? (paragraph 4, 6, and 9)

2. What does “ shouted ” mean? (paragraph 7)

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

Beginning Short Stories – “Oh No!”



Basic Version

I woke up at 7:30. I was late. Oh no!

I got to work. I did not get to the meeting in time. Oh no!

I went to lunch. I did not know where my wallet was. Oh no!

I came back home. It was raining. Oh no!

I cooked dinner. I cooked the rice too much. Oh no!

I ate dinner with my friends and family. We had a very good time. We laughed

and talked together.

I felt happy. Oh yes!

Advanced Version

I woke up at 7:30. I was late. Oh no!

I got to work. I missed the meeting. Oh no!

I went to lunch. I lost my wallet. Oh no!

I returned home. It was raining. Oh no!

I cooked dinner. I burned the rice. Oh no!

I ate dinner with my friends and family. We had a great time. We laughed and

talked together.

I felt happy. Oh yes!

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Questions:

1. What time did I wake up?

2. Why did I miss the meeting?

3. What tense is the story in: Past, Present, or Future?

Vocabulary:To find word definitions: First, find the word in the advanced version of the story. Then,



1.

What does “ missed ” mean? ( line 2)

2.

What does “lost” mean? ( line 3)

3. What does “ returned ” mean? ( line 4)

4. What does “ burned ” mean? ( line 5)

5.

What does “ great” mean? ( line 6)

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

Beginning Short Stories – “What Do We Have to Eat?”



Basic Version

I want to eat some food.

Well, what do you want to eat?

I do not know. What do we have to eat?

Well, we have eggs, rice, beans, bread, ham, and cheese.

Do we have any steak?

No, we do not have any steak.

Noooo! I want steak.

Well, we do not have any steak. I told you what we have.

Okay. Can I have some eggs and ham please.

Sure.

But wait! I want something to drink also!

Advanced Version

I am hungry.

Well, what do you want to eat?

I do not know. What do we have to eat?

Well, we have eggs, rice, beans, bread, ham, and cheese.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Do we have any steak?

No, we do not have any steak.

Noooo! I want steak.

Well, we do not have any steak. I told you what we have.

Okay. Can I have some eggs and ham please.

Sure.

But wait! I am thirsty too!

Questions:

1. What do we have to eat?

2. What do I want to eat?




1. What does “ hungry” mean? (line 1)

2. What does “ thirsty” mean? (last line of the story)

3. What does “ too” mean? (last line of the story)

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

Beginning Short Stories – “A Call to the Pool”



Basic Version

Today it is very hot outside. How can I cool down? Maybe I can go swimming at

the pool. I need to find out what time it opens. I will make a call.

I pressed the numbers on the phone and waited.

“Ring. Ring.”

“Hello, this is Andrea at the pool. How can I help you?”

“Hi, I want to know what time the pool opens.”

“Oh okay. The pool opens at 10:30 in the morning.”

“Okay, thank you!”

“You are welcome. Bye.”

“Good bye.”

Great! It is 10:00 in the morning now. That means the pool will open in thirty

minutes!”

Advanced Version

Today it is very hot outside. How can I cool down? Maybe I can go swimming atthe pool. I need to find out what time it opens. I will make a call.

I dialed the phone and waited.

“Ring. Ring.”

“Hello, this is Andrea at the pool. How can I help you?”

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


“Hi, I want to know what time the pool opens.”

“Oh okay. The pool opens at 10:30 am.”

“Okay, thank you!”

“You are welcome. Bye.”

“Good bye.”

Great! It is 10:00 am. That means the pool will open in half and hour!”

Questions:

1.

Who answered the phone?

2. What time is the pool open?

3.

What time is it now?




1. What does “ dialed ” mean? (paragraph 2, sentence 1)

2. What does “ am” mean? (paragraph 6, sentence 1)

3. What does “ half an hour” mean? (the last line of the story)

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

Beginning Short Stories – “An Overcast Day”



Basic Version

Hi, nice to meet you. My name is Tetsuo.

Hi, nice to meet you as well. My name is James. How are you?

I am fine, thank you. How are you?

I am unhappy.

Why are you unhappy?

I am unhappy because it is dark and cloudy. I do not like this weather.

Do not worry! Tomorrow it will be sunny!

Advanced Version

Hi, nice to meet you. My name is Tetsuo.

Hi, nice to meet you as well. My name is James. How are you?

I am fine, thank you. How are you?

I am unhappy.

Why are you unhappy?

I am unhappy because it is overcast . I do not like this weather.

Do not worry! Tomorrow it will be sunny!

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Questions:

1. How is Tetsuo?

2. Why is James unhappy?

3. What will the weather be like tomorrow?




1. What does “ overcast ” mean? ( sentence 6)

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

Beginning Short Stories – “Who Knows My Name?”



Basic Version

Let’s play a game! My name starts with the letter “J”. Who knows my name?

Is it Jennifer? No.

Is it Janet? No.

Those are good tries to get the answer. But you do not know it yet! The last letter

in my name is “A”. Who knows my name?

Is it Jessica? No.

Is it Julia? Yes! That was a very good try. You win!

Advanced Version

Let’s play a game! My name starts with the letter “J”. Who knows my name?

Is it Jennifer? No.

Is it Janet? No.

Those are good guesses. But you do not know it yet! My name ends with the

letter “A”. Who knows my name?

Is it Jessica? No.

Is it Julia? Yes! That was a great guess. You win!

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Questions:

1.

What was the first letter of her name?

2. What was the last letter of her name?

3. What was her name?

Vocabulary:




1. What does “ guesses” mean? (paragraph 4, sentence 1)

2.

What does “end ” mean? (paragraph 4, sentence 3)

3. What does “ great” mean? (the last line of the story)

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““BBeellllaa HHiiddeess”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


Bella is hiding. She is behind the sofa with her pet puppy, Sir.

Bella is hiding from her mom. She does not want to go to the doctor.

“Bella?” calls Bella’s mom in a sweet voice. “Where are you?”

Bella’s mom looks in the closet. She looks in the kitchen. She looks next to thebookcase. Bella always hides when she is scared.

Bella is very quiet. Sir begins to jump around behind the sofa.

Bella’s mom hears the noise. She looks behind the sofa with a smile. She holdsout her hand.

“Don’t be scared,” says Bella’s mom. “The doctor just wants to check your ears.”

“Will I have to get a shot?” asks Bella.

“No,” says Mom.

That makes Bella feel better. Bella grabs her mom’s hand. They go to see thedoctor.

Questions:

11)) Why is Bella hiding?


A. □ She is playing a game.

B. □ She does not want to go tothe doctor.

C. □ She is looking for her puppy.

D. □ She is scared.

22)) Who or what is hiding with Bella?

A. Her mom B. Her sister C. Her pet puppy D. Her friend

33)) Who is looking for Bella?

A. ________________

44)) Where does Mom find Bella?

A. in the kitchen B. in the closet C. next to the bookcase D. behind the sofa

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



55)) How does Mom find Bella?

A. Bella makes a noise.B. Dad helps Mom.C. Mom sees Bella's leg.D. The puppy makes a noise.

66)) When does Bella hide?

A. when she is boredB. when she is scaredC. when she is happyD. all the time

77)) What does Mom say will happenwhen Bella sees the doctor?

A. Bella will get her ears checked.B. Bella will get a shot.C. Bella will get to bring her puppy.

D. Bella will get her eyes checked.

88)) How does Bella feel when Momsays she will not get a shot?

A. angryB. betterC. smart

D. tired

Have you ever been nervous about going to the doctor? Explain.

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““BBiigg CCiittyy NNooiissee”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


My name is Olaf.

I live in a big city.I live on a busy road.

At night and during the day, cars go by.Buses go by.Trucks go by.

People do not seem to hear the noise during the day.But at night, the noise makes it hard to sleep.

My road has a lot of animals, too.People keep their animals outside in their yards at night.There are cats.There are dogs.

The dogs make a lot of noise.To me, the dogs are like the trucks.The dogs are like the cars.The dogs are like the buses.

All of them are loud!

One dog barks more than the others do. His name is Simba.Simba is Mr. Cheek’s dog. “That is a very bad dog. He keeps me up at night,” says Mr. Lucas. M r. Lucaslives next door to Mr. Cheek. “You should give him away,” says Mr. Lucas. This makes Mr. Cheek very mad. "You should not sleep with your windowsopen," says Mr. Cheek."You should take your dog inside at night," yells Mr. Lucas.

The two men argue about Simba’s barking almost every day. I think this is funny.

To me, Simba is as bad as the cars.He is as bad as the buses.He is as bad as the trucks.

This is what living in a big city is like. There is a lot of noise.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Questions:

11)) In what place does Olaf live?

A. ____________________

____________________

____________________

22)) What does Olaf say makes noise?


A. □ airplanes

B. □ buses

C. □ dogs

D. □ horses

33)) What goes by at night?

A. bikes

B. cats C. dogs D. trucks

44)) Why may people NOT hear thenoise during the day?

A. because it is quiet B. because they are sleepy C. because they are busy doing

other things D. because they do not hear well

during the day

55)) What does Olaf say about his road?


A. □ It is dark. B. □ It is busy.

C. □ It is dirty.

D. □ It is noisy.

66)) Which noise makes Mr. Lucasmad?

A. cats meowing B. trucks going by C. a dog barking D. people talking

77)) Who argues every day?

A. Mr. Lucas and Olaf B. Olaf and Mr. Cheek

C. Simba and Mr. Lucas D. Mr. Lucas and Mr. Cheek

88)) What could Mr. Cheek do to helpMr. Lucas sleep?

A. get a cat

B. not argue with him C. not drive his car at night D. take his dog inside at night

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



99)) What could Mr. Lucas do to sleepbetter?

A. close his windows at night B. not argue with Mr. Cheek C. go to bed later D. talk to Olaf

1100)) Who says Simba is a bad dog?

A. ____________________

____________________

____________________

1111)) Who does Mr. Cheek live next doorto?

A. OlafB. Mr. Lucas

C. Olaf and Mr. LucasDD.. no one

1122)) What does Olaf mean when hesays Simba is as bad as thebuses?

A. that Simba barks at the buses

B. that Simba and the buses argueC. that Simba runs down the streetat night

D. that Simba and the buses bothmake noise

1133)) According to Olaf, what could bedone about noise in a big town?

A. People could ride bikes.

B. Dogs could be inside.C. People could walk everywhere.D. Nothing can be done.

Is it better to live in the city, or in the country? Why?

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““BBiir r ddss”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


A bird is a kind of animal.

A bird has two wings. Birds are the only animal with feathers.

Pigeons, eagles, swans and blue jays are all kinds of birds.

Most birds can fly.

Turkeys and penguins are two kinds of birds that cannot fly.

Questions:

11)) What is this passage about?

A. what birds are like B. why some birds can’t fly C. where birds have feathers

22)) What birds can fly?

A. all birds B. most birds C. some birds

33)) According to the passage, which ofthese birds cannot fly?

A. eaglesB. swansC. turkeys

44)) All birds are _________.

A. animalsB. blue jaysC. penguins

Do you like birds? What is your favorite kind of bird? Why?

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““BBlliizzzzaar r dd iinn BBiir r mmiinngghhaamm”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


The Turner kids were not accustomed to snow. The most theyever got in their southern city of Birmingham was an inch or soeach winter, and even that was quite infrequent.

What was funny was that even the slightest bit of snow was enough to cancelschool and close businesses. No one knew how to drive in the stuff. It was neverenough for young Lily Mae Turner, though, because the snow that came wasalways too sparse to build a snowman or to go sledding.

But one night, in March of 1993, something magical happened.

An unexpected blast of cold air from Canada and moist air from the Caribbeanconverged on the eastern part of the United States to create the “Storm of theCentury.”

All the Turner kids knew was that when they woke up Saturday morning, therewas 17 inches of unbelievable snow on their front lawn and as far as the eyecould see.

The Turner parents were in shock. Most folks in town were ill-prepared for such astorm. They had no shovels to dig their way out and no salt to keep from slipping.They had no idea what to do.

While the adults seemed paralyzed with disbelief, the Turner kids set abouthaving the time of their lives. Lily Mae discovered that a rope tied to a metaltrashcan lid made a perfect sled. John Henry figured out that if he put his feet inplastic grocery bags before putting on his rain boots, his feet stayed warm for alonger time. Rachel made snow angels in every part of the yard. Together, all thekids made a huge snowman and dressed it in dad’s hat and jacket. (Mr. Turnerdidn’t own a scarf!)

For three straight days, the Turner kids had a splendid time. On Tuesday, thetemperature hit 70 degrees, and life for these southerners went back to normal.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Questions:

11)) What does accustomed mean?

A. used to B. aware of C. scared of D. interested in

22)) Which is the best antonymfor infrequent ?

A. common B. long C. rare D. surprising

33)) Which other title would fit thispassage best?

A. “1993”

B. “A Cold March” C. “Magical Snow” D. “No Scarf for a Snowman”

44)) Why might the author havedescribed the storm as magical?

A. because Lily Mae believed the

snow was magic B. because it was such an unusualthing to happen, it felt like magic

C. because there was no otherexplanation for why the stormoccurred

D. because the author wanted tocast doubt on whether the stormactually took place

55)) How are the children different thanthe adults in this passage?

A. The kids stayed warm, while theadults were very cold.

B. The kids knew the storm wascoming, while the adults did not.

C. The adults still had to go towork, while the kids stayedhome.

D. The kids went out and had fun,

while the adults did not knowwhat to do.

66)) What conclusions can be drawnabout what the weather is usuallylike in Birmingham during March?


A. □ It is warm.

B. □ It is sunny.

C. □ It is windy.

D. □ It does not snow.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



77)) What can be said about the Turnerkids' ideas for playing in the snowwithout the usual snow gear?


A. □ They were creative.

B. □ They were complicated.

C. □ They were effective.

D. □ They were misguided.

88)) "What was funny was that even the slightest bit of snow was enough tocancel school and close businesses."

"No one knew how to drive in the stuff."

▼ Which is the best way to combine the above sentences?

A. What was funny was that even the slightest bit of snow was enough tocancel school and close businesses, no one knew how to drive in thestuff.

B. What was funny was that even the slightest bit of snow was enough tocancel school and close businesses; no one knew how to drive in thestuff.

C.What was funny was that even the slightest bit of snow was enough tocancel school and close businesses: no one knew how to drive in thestuff.

D. What was funny was that even the slightest bit of snow was enough tocancel school and close businesses - no one knew how to drive in thestuff.

99)) What was going on outside ofBirmingham during this passage?

A. The reader does not find out.B. There was no snow anywhere

else.C. A storm of historic proportions

took place. D. The entire country was dealing

with snow.

1100)) What is the best antonymfor splendid ?

A. greatB. perfectC. happyD. terrible

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““BBuulllliieedd”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


Bryan doesn't like going to school anymore.

He is tired of being bullied.

Some of the bigger boys at school are mean to him.

They push him to the ground.

They hide his books.

They call him names.

They are bullies.

When things get really bad, Bryan tells his mom he is sick.

“You should stay home and rest,” Mom says. “You'll feel better tomorrow.”

Then Bryan gets to stay home.

He reads books. He watches television. He eats what he wants. He is not scared.

“You should tell someone you are getting bullied at school,” says Bryan’s bestfriend, Link.

But Bryan is scared. He doesn't want to tell an adult.

“That will make things worse, Link,” says Bryan. “You don’t go to my school. Youhave no idea how mean these guys can be.”

“You can’t keep missing school,” says Link. “Your grades will fall. You will be introuble at home. And besides, you don't want to be in the seventh grade forever,

do you?"

Bryan thinks Link is probably right. He will tell his mom about the bullies todaywhen she gets home from work.

He will see what happens.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Questions:

11)) Why doesn't Bryan like going toschool anymore?

A. The work is hard.

B. The kids are mean. C. His best friend does not gothere.

D. He wants to read books athome.

22)) How might Bryan feel when the kidsat school are mean to him?


A. □ angry

B. □ strong

C. □ smart

D. □ scared

33)) Who are the bullies in this story?

A. Bryan and LinkB. the bigger girls in Bryan's school

C. the teachers D. the bigger boys in Bryan's

school

44)) What grade is Bryan in?

A. ____________________

____________________

____________________

55)) What do the mean kids do to Bryan?


A. □ They call him names.

B. □ They push him to the ground. C. □ They steal his money.

D. □ They hide his book bag.

66)) Why hasn't Bryan's mom helpedhim?

A. She is busy at work.B. She does not care.

C. She does not know. D. She does not want to.

77)) How might Bryan's mom help whenBryan tells her he is being bullied?

A. She might hurt the mean kids.B. She might pack Bryan an extra

lunch.

C. She might talk to the teachers atthe school.

D. She might tell Bryan to stayhome sick.

88)) What does Bryan do when he stayshome from school?

A. his homeworkB. plays video gamesC. gets scared

D. reads books

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



1100)) Who tells Bryan that he should tellsomeone?

A. ____________________

____________________

____________________

1100)) What is likely to happen if Bryankeeps missing school?

A. He will get fat. B. His grades will fall. C. Link will stop being his friend. D. The bullies will come to his

house.

1111)) When does Bryan plan to tell hismom about the bullies?

A. ____________________

____________________

____________________

1122)) What kind of friend is Link?


A. □ caring B. □ shy

C. □ helpful

D. □ scared

1133)) What does it mean to be bullied ?

A. to not have friends at school B. to have a lot of work C. to have people say and do mean

things to you D. to not like school

Have you ever been bullied? Do you know someone who has? Explain.

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““BByy tthhee WWaatteer r ”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


I live in a house by the water.I sit by the water each day.

I take my bag there with me. In it, I pack a book, a blanket, a chair, and a basket of food.

I walk down my back steps and sit in the same spot along the grass.

When I go out to the water in the morning, I am alone.

I hear the water.I see the boats.I feel calm.

I t is the part of th e day I l ike best .

Later, some children come to play by the water.It is afternoon.I hear them laughing.I see them play ball.

“Nestor, Nestor!” the children yell when they see me on the beach. I wave and smile.“Play ball with us, Nestor!” the children shout. “No, thanks,” I say. "I am too old to play ball. I walk with a cane and my handsare no longer good at catching."

I try to read my book, but it is hard with all the noise.

I watch mothers and fathers fish along the shore. I am happy.I hear the water.I see the boats.

I eat my lunch.

Later, the sky gets dark.I gather all of my things and go back to the house.I get in bed. I hear the water through my open window.The sound puts me to sleep.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Questions:

11)) Where does Nestor live?

A. on a farm

B. on a mountain top C. in a boat on the water D. in a house by the water

22)) What does Nestor do each day?

A. sit by the water

B. play by the water C. run by the water D. swim in the water

33)) What does Nestor bring with him tothe water?


A. □ a newspaper

B. □ a blanket C. □ food

D. □ his fishing pole

44)) Who is with Nestor in the morning?

A. ____________________

____________________

____________________

55)) What do the children do by thewater?


A. □ boat

B. □ fish C. □ laugh

D. □ play ball

66)) When do children come to thewater?

A. ____________________

____________________

____________________

77)) What kind of person does Nestorseem to be?

A. calm B. sad

C. loud D. young

88)) What does the children's noisemake it hard for Nestor to do?

A. eat B. catch fish

C. read D. sleep

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



99)) Who fishes?

A. ____________________

____________________

____________________

1100)) Why doesn't Nestor play with thechildren?


A. □ He feels he is too old.

B. □ He cannot catch.

C. □ He is very hungry.

D. □ He is very sleepy.

1111)) How do Nestor's feelings changeduring the story?

A. from calm to sleepy to happyB. from sleepy to calm to happyC. from calm to happy to sleepyD. from happy to sleepy to calm

1122)) What does Nestor mean when hesays that the sky gets dark ?

A. that it is nightB. that it is rainingC. that the wind is blowingD. that the sky is angry

1133)) What is Nestor's favorite part of theday?

A. the morningB. when he is watching the childrenC. the afternoonDD.. the night

1144)) When does Nestor hear the water?

A. only in the morningB. only in the afternoonC. only in the night

DD.. all the time

1155)) What is another way to say I t is the

part of th e day I l ike best ?

A. I do not like this part of the day.B. I love this part of the day.C. It is my favorite part of the day.D. I like all parts of the day.

What is your favorite part of the day? Why?

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““CCaannooppyy oof f NNaattuur r ee”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


Dad decided last Sunday that we should all go on a camping trip.

He read an article in the Sunday paper about camping and how it “brings familiestogether under the canopy of nature.”

“Overrated,” I joked. “What about the canopy of television or the canopy ofrestaurant food?”

“This will be good for us,” Dad said, sliding the magazine across the coffee table.

“Let’s go next week-end.”

I shot a quick look over at my little brother, Paul. He gave me a slow eyebrowraise which meant, “This will probably not go off completely as planned.”

My smile back said, "But it will surely be fun."

I started to think back. Once Dad decided “we should all learn how to canoe.” Weborrowed two canoes from our friends, hoisted them on the van and drove forthree hours to a secluded lake in Virginia. Once we got there, we discoveredthat we had forgotten the paddles.

Paul and I got in a canoe with Dad, and our two younger sisters got in a canoewith Mom. We floated aimlessly around the lake for hours. Then we all jumped inwith our life jackets on. We pushed the canoes back to shore. It was a fantastictrip.

Another time, Dad decided “we should all learn how to ski.” All of us hate the coldso we spent the week-end huddled by the fire, drinking hot cocoa in the ski lodgeand playing board games. It was great. We had a blast.

When I stopped daydreaming, Mom was saying, “Sweetheart, we don’t have atent.”

“We don’t need one!” Dad said happily. “We’ll take all the seats out the van whenwe get to the campsite and put in an air mattress.”

I don't know what the punch line will be on this excursion, but I am sure withMom, Dad and the four of us kids scrunched in a van at some national park, weare bound to have a good time.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Questions:

11)) Which other title fits this passagebest?

A. “No Paddles” B. “Never as Planned” C. "Hot Cocoa by the Fire" D. "Van Camping for Beginners"

22)) What literary term best describesthe narrator's daydreams?

A. foreshadowing, meaning the useof hints to suggest what is tocome

B. irony, meaning a contrastbetween what is stated and whatis really meant

C. flashback, meaning a scene thatinterrupts the action to showwhat happened at an earlier time

D. metaphor, meaning the

comparison of two unlike thingswith the intent of giving addedmeaning to one of them

33)) Which of the following could bedescribed as secluded ?


A. □ a deserted island

B. □ an amusement park

C. □ a hiking trail known only to afew

D. □ a popular beach on theCalifornia coast

44)) What lesson does the narrator'sfamily seem to live by?

A. Camping is an adventure. B. Danger is only in the

imagination.

C. Things don't need to go asplanned to have fun.

D. Reading newspapers is aprescription for trouble.

55)) Which is the best synonymfor excursion?

A. evolution B. exodus C. expedition D. hiatus

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



66)) "Then we all jumped in with our life jackets on. We pushed the canoes backto shore."

▼Which is the best way to combine the above sentences?

A. We all jumped in with our life jackets on as we pushed the canoes back toshore.

B. Then we all jumped in with our life jackets on, pushing the canoes back toshore.

C. We pushed the canoes back to shore while we all jumped in with our life jackets on.

D. After we all jumped in with our life jackets on, we pushed the canoes backto shore.

77)) Which best describes the narrator'stone?

A. condescending B. sarcastic C. jovial D. annoyed

88)) Why might the narrator say that thecamping trip will have a punch line?

A. He feels the trip will beexpensive.

B. He feels the trip will havedifficulties.

C. He feels the trip will have afunny ending.

D. He feels the sleeping in suchclose quarters will causefighting.

Do you like to go on excursions? Explain.

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““CCiittyy GGiir r ll”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


I am a city girl at heart. I’ve never milked a cow – have no interest.

I was shocked when I attended my first “pig pickin’ ” after my husband andI moved to North Carolina from Boston. I had to avert my eyes from the huge pig,skin and head on, insides chopped and splayed open across an entire 12-footlong table.

“Y’all in duh country naw, girl,” the host told me happily, apparently thrilled to bethe one to indoctrinate me into country living.

When, at 8 months pregnant, I volunteered to chaperone my son’s strawberrypicking field trip, the other mothers looked at me strangely. I thought strawberriesgrew on tall bushes, not low to the ground. All that squatting sent me into earlylabor.

So, it is with this in mind that you must understand my attitude when I heard a“huge hurricane” was headed toward Rocky Mount. I thought back to my daysgrowing up in Philadelphia, when snow storms where coming – “20 inches”--never to materialize.

A long checklist ran in the local newspaper of things townspeople should get toprepare for the hurricane. My neighbor, Wayne, made a point of giving me a copy

since he knew I was new to town. I took a cursory glance and thought nothingmore of it.

While my neighbors were running around taping their windows, getting freshbatteries and prepping their generators, I was, quite literally, sitting in my glasshouse playing with the kids on the floor.

The rains started at 2 o’clock in the afternoon. This was, to my amazement,exactly what the weatherman had predicted.

These were no ordinary rains, either. From my glass living room, I could nolonger see the front lawn or the trees. The rain was as thick as a woolen curtain.

My husband’s car began floating out of the driveway by nightfall. The water, soinsidious, began creeping up our front steps, overturning our potted plants andbenches.

“This is unbelievable!” I yelled. I reached for the phone to dial Wayne. He hadbeen born and raised in these parts, and surely, he would know what to do.

“Wayne,” I said worriedly into the receiver. “The water is coming up our frontsteps. It’s almost to our door!”

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


“Ours too,” he said, quite calmly, I thought, given the circumstances.

“What should I do?”

“Put out your sandbags. It will keep the water out as long as it doesn’t get toohigh.”

“Sandbags?” “You didn’t get any? They were on the list,” he asked in disbelief.

No, I hadn’t.

Questions:

11)) What other title might fit thispassage best?

A. "Pining for Boston" B. "Learning Hurricanes" C. "Picking Strawberries" D. "Snow Storms that Don't Come"

22)) What seems to be the author'spurpose in the first four paragraphs

of this passage?

A. to let the reader know that thenarrator went into early labor

B. to let the reader know that thenarrator does not like pulledpork

C. to let the reader know that thenarrator is unfamiliar withcountry life

D. to let the reader know that the

narrator wants to move back toBoston

33)) "I had to avert my eyes from the huge pig, skin and head on, insides choppedand splayed open across an entire 12-foot long table."

▼ Choose the best way to rewrite the above sentence.

A. I had to open my eyes to the huge pig, skin and head on, insides choppedand splayed open across an entire 12-foot long table.

B. I had to direct my eyes towards the huge pig, skin and head on, insides

chopped and splayed open across an entire 12-foot long table.C. I had to turn my eyes away from the huge pig, skin and head on, insides

chopped and splayed open across an entire 12-foot long table.D. I had to cover my eyes from the huge pig, skin and head on, insides

chopped and splayed open across an entire 12-foot long table.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



44)) What does materialize mean?

A. to arrive B. to increase in size C. to become actual or realD. to be concerned with consumergoods.

55)) Select the best literary term for thefollowing quote: “Y’all in duh country

naw, girl.”

A. yarn, suggesting an improbabletale

B. vice, characterized as an evilhabit or wicked tendency

C. whimsical, characterized asexpressing fanciful or oddnotions

D. vernacular, meaning the nativelanguage of people in a

particular geographical area

66)) Which best describes the narrator'sattitude in this passage?

A. forgetful of rural life B. unaware of country ways C. anxious to get back to Boston D. wishful for her children to grow

up in the city

77)) Which is the best antonymfor cursory?

A. angry and willfulB. fast and intelligentC. slow and deliberate D. slow and superficial

88)) What does it mean to literally dosomething?

A. to think about doing something B. to do something exactly as said

CC.. to do something and regret itlater

DD.. to do something with a badattitude

99)) What message does the authorconvey by having the narrator waitout the storm in a glass room?

A. It signifies how vulnerable sheis.

B. It signifies the narrator'snontraditional tastes.

C. It lets the reader know that she

has not taped up her windows.D. It lets the reader know she cansee everything that's going on.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



1100)) Which best describes the useof woolen curtain in this passage?

A. It is used an analogy, meaning

the comparison of two things. B. It is used as comic relief,

meaning it offers humor in atense situation.

C. It is used as personification,meaning something describedas if it were human.

D. It is used as satire, meaning itridicules the weakness of aninstitution.

1111)) If the passage were to continue,what might happen next?


A. □ Water might get into thehouse.

B. □ The narrator may flee tosafety to Wayne's house.

C. □ The narrator might get in hercar and drive to store forsandbags.

D. □ The narrator might ask toborrow some of Wayne'ssandbags.

1122)) Which proverb is most likelylearned by the narrator during thehurricane?

A. Like will draw like. B. Misfortune tests the sincerity of

friends. C. It is best to prepare for the day

of necessity.

D. It is wise to turn circumstancesto good account.

1133)) How might the narrator havechanged her fate?

A. She could have taped herwindows.

B. She could have replaced her oldbatteries.

C. She could have prepped hergenerator.

D. She could have purchased theitems from the hurricane list.

Which do you like better, the country or the city? Why?

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


●●●●●●R R eeaad d T T hheeoor r y y ..OOr r g g © © 2 2 0 0 110 0 Name ________________ EEnngglliisshhFFoor r EEvveer r yyoonnee..OOr r gg © © 2 2 0 0 0 0 8 8 Date ________________

““CClleeaann WWaatteer r A Acctt”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


Josiah Hodge collapsed in a seat at the Café du Monde restaurant in NewOrleans. He put his head in his hands and let out a deep sigh.

Josiah had come to New Orleans as a public service. He had come up with theidea to develop a play for children affected by Hurricane Katrina and had secureda modest grant from the government to do so. But he hadn’t accounted for themajor hindrance he would face: blistering heat in August with no clean water todrink.

Buying water for his crew of 38 volunteers for weeks on end would be far too

expensive to do on his shoestring budget , and he had no one to turn to on suchshort notice for help. Josiah feared he would have to close up the production andreturn home.

As he sipped on a glass of soda, he found it ironic that water, which flooded thiscity and left many residents without homes or hope, would now be his downfallas he tried to spread the joy of theater to its children.

“Hello, sir,” a man at the table next to him said. “What brings you to NewOrleans?”

Josiah shook his head. Later, he would find it amusing that this man knew, justby looking, that Josiah was not a local. For now, he was just tired and irritated.

“Look, I don’t mean to be rude, but I’ve had a bad day,” Josiah said. “I don’t muchfeel like talking.”

“What brings you to town?” the man said, pleasantly.

Josiah grudgingly talked a bit about his work as a theater director in Manhattanand his dream to bring a top flight play to the children of New Orleans.

The next day, as Josiah left a blazing hot outdoor studio, he noticed the same

man from the restaurant, parked on the street. A shock of fluffy white hair framedhis dark face, making him look almost saintly.

“Look sir, what do you want?”

“To help.”

“How?”

“What do you need?”

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


“What I really need is clean water. That’s all I need.” Josiah turned and walkedaway. He had been rude, he knew, but he was so frustrated by this problem.

When he arrived back at his hotel room that evening, the front desk clerk handedJosiah an unmarked envelope. Inside was a check for $2,000. The memo lineread, “For water.”

Josiah was flabbergasted. Who was this man?

As he pondered his good fortune, the phone rang in his hotel room.“Will that get you some water?” a voice said on the other end.

“Why, yes, yes it will,” Josiah said. “Thank you so much for your generosity.”

“My wife and I would like to take you to dinner.”

Josiah could not refuse! This man was his savior, and his curiosity had gotten thebest of him. Who was this benefactor?

At dinner, Etienne Fanchon and his wife, Adelaide, formally introducedthemselves. Mr. Fanchon never graduated from high school, but inherited 5acres of land from his father upon his death. For years, Mr. Fanchon grewcucumbers on the land, barely making a living. One day, a neighbor offeredFanchon a bag of money if Mr. Fanchon would let him bury three old trucks at theback of his property.

Mr. Fanchon took the bag and agreed. Later, he could not believe how muchmoney was in the bag. “And just for letting him bury some trucks!”

The next morning, Mr. Fanchon said, he woke up, picked all the cucumbers off

his land and converted the 5 acres into a waste management facility. He is nowone of New Orleans’ few multimillionaires.

“So, I have all this money now and live to help others,” said Mr. Fanchon. “That iswhy I’ve helped you.”

Questions:

11)) Which best describes Josiah'smood at the beginning of this

passage?

A. tired and vindictive B. angry and conniving C. pensive and high strung D. frustrated and overwhelmed

22)) How does Josiah's mood changewhen he gets the check?

A. He is thankful and curious. B. He is confused and questioning. C. He is excited and unstable. D. He is suspicious and cautious.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



33)) Which best serves as the climax ofthis story?

A. when Josiah opens theenvelope

B. when Mr. Fanchon shows up atthe studio

C. when Mr. Fanchon describeshow he got so rich

D. when Josiah accepts Mr.Fanchon's invitation to dinner

44)) Mr. Fanchon is described in thepassage as saintly, and as beingthe narrator's savior. What can you

infer from this description?


A. □ that he has many secrets

B. □ that he has helped thenarrator immensely

C. □ that he helps everyone hecomes in contact with

D. □ that for the narrator, there is

something divine about Mr.Fanchon

55)) Which is the best antonymfor hindrance?

A. assistanceB. obstacleC. profitD. strength

66)) Using the passage as a guide, whatdoes it mean to do something ona shoestring budget ?

A. to do something with little helpB. to do something with little luckC. to do something with little money

D. to do something with littlepatience

77)) Which is the best antonymfor irritated?

A. acclimatedB. bashfulC. melancholyD. mollified

88)) What lesson does Josiah learn inthis passage?

A. It is okay to be somewhat rudeon first meeting.

B. Help can come from the mostunlikely of places.

C. Frustration can often cloud one's judgment.D. Theater programs are an

excellent way to help those inneed.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



99)) Why does Josiah grudgingly talk toMr. Fanchon in the Cafe du Monde?

A. He is hungry.B. He is irritated and does not feel

like being bothered.C. He decided conversation might

make him feel better.D. He wanted to spread the word

about his theater program.

1100)) In this passage, how are Josiahand Mr. Fanchon alike?

A. Both are patient.B. Both lack ambition.C. Both are quick to show emotion.D. Both have philanthropic

interests.

What does it mean to be altruistic? Are you an altruist? Explain.

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Questions:

11)) Which is most likely to make arelationship inimical?

A. great pathos B. frequent maledictions C. magnanimous gestures D. ingenuous discussions

22)) Which is the best synonymfor invectives ?

A. icons B. decisions C. paragons D. accusations

33)) If this passage were true, which would best describe it?

A. a literary essay, based on a piece of literature B. a memoir essay, centered on a significant memory from the past C. a persuasive essay, characterized by choosing a side and refuting other

arguments D. an expository essay, meant to acquaint the reader with a body of

knowledge

44)) What event does the father'scomment foreshadow?

A. Mother is irrational. B. Tammy is fawning. C. The sisters are both kicked out

of the house.D. The narrator, mother and

Tammy all have the samedream.

55)) What is the tone of this passage?

A. matter-of-fact B. mawkish C. maudlin D. mercurial

66)) How does the relationship between the narrator, her mother and sister seemto change from the beginning of passage to end?

A. from brusque to florid B. from egregious to impassiveC. from enervating to rejuvenatingD. from destructive to collaborative

EE..

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


FF..


77)) Which is the best antonym for pellucid ?

A. conspicuous B. disquieting C. enlightening D. incomprehensible

88)) "I bite into an apple. All of my teeth fall out."

▼Choose the best way to combine the above sentences.

A. I bite into an apple, all of my teeth fall out.

B. As all my teeth fall out, I bite into an apple. C. I bite into an apple, and all of my teeth fall out. D. While I bite into I bite into an apple, all my teeth fell out.

99)) "The professor der ides me for my poor performance."

▼Choose the best way to rewrite the above sentence.

A. The professor is in disbelief due to my poor performance.B. The professor laughs mockingly at my poor performance.

C. The professor gives me a failing grade for my poor performance.D. The professor gives me a tutorial because of my poor performance.

1100)) Which words have a negativeconnotation?


A. □ alacrity

B. □ deprecated

C. □ dithered

D. □ pugnacious

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



1111)) If the professor in the narrator's dream represented someone in her life, whomight that person be, and why?

A. the sister, because she was described in the passage as ditheringB. the mother, because she was described in the passage as mean-spiritedC. the narrator, because she seems to be testing everyone in the passageD. the father, because he understood that that the three women were alike

1122)) Which is the best way to make these fragments grammaticallycorrect? Breakthrough? No idea.

A. Breakthrough, no idea.B. Was this a breakthrough? I have no idea.

C. If this was a breakthrough I have no idea. D. I had no idea. This was a breakthrough.

What kind of dreams do you have? What do they mean…anything? Explain.

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““FFiir r sstt PPr r iizzee”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


My name is Tess and I ride horses.

I ride them in the circus.I ride them in parades. I ride them in shows.

I am riding in a horse show today.

My horse runs.

My horse jumps.My horse dances.

I hold on!

My horse is the best.I named her Twin.I feel like the horse and I are the same when I ride her.

My mother is not at the horse show.She has to work.

My father is there. He claps. He yells. He smiles.

The show ends. A man announces the winners."First prize goes to Tess and Twin!" he says.

He gives me a blue ribbon.

I am very excited. My dad gives me a hug.

"You won!" he says.

My dad and I go home.My dad tells my mom about my ribbon.

She cries.She gives me a big hug.

“Your hard work is showing,” she says.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Questions:

11)) Where does Tess ride her horse?


A. □ in the circusB. □ at schoolC. □ in parades D. □ in the woods

22)) What prize does Tess win in thehorse show?

A. _________________

_________________

_________________

33)) What does Tess need to do whileher horse runs and jumps?

A. dance

B. hold onC. sing D. stand up

44)) Where is Tess's mother during theshow?

A. _________________

_________________

_________________

55)) Why does Tess's father yell?

A. He is mad.B. He needs help.C. He is surprised.

D. He is excited.

66)) Why do you think Tess named thehorse Twin?

A. because Tess has a twinB. because there are two horses

C. because another horse looksvery similar to Twin

D. because Tess feels the same asTwin when they ride

77)) What color ribbon does Tess get?

A. _________________

_________________

_________________

88)) How does Tess's mom feel aboutthe ribbon?


A. □ happyB. □ madC. □ proudD. □ sad

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““FFlloowweer r PPoowweer r ”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


When her grandmother’s health began to deteriorate in the fall of 1994,Mary would make the drive from Washington, DC to Winchester, Va., everyfew days.

She hated highway driving, finding it ugly and monotonous. She preferred totake meandering back roads to her grandmother’s hospital. When she drovethrough the rocky town of Harpers Ferry, the beauty of the rough waters churningat the intersection of the Shenandoah and Potomac riversalways captivated her.

Toward the end of her journey, Mary actually did have to get on highway 81. Itwas here that she discovered a surprising bit of beauty during one of her trips.

Along the median of the highway, there were a long stretch of wildflowers. Theywere thin and delicate and purple, almost poetic in appearance.

The first time she saw the flowers, Mary was seized by an uncontrollable urge topull over on the highway and yank a bunch from the soil. She carried them intoher grandmother’s room when she arrived at the hospital and placed them in awater pitcher by her bed.

For a moment her grandmother seemed more lucid than usual. She thanked

Mary for the flowers, commented on their beauty and asked where she hadgotten them. Mary was overjoyed by the flowers’ seeming ability to wakesomething up inside her ailing grandmother.

Afterwards, Mary began carrying scissors in the car during her trips to visitgrandma. She would quickly glide onto the shoulder, jump out the car, and clip abunch of flowers. Each time Mary placed the flowers in the pitcher, hergrandmother’s eyes would light up and they would have a splendid conversation.

One morning in late October, Mary got a call that her grandmother had taken aturn for the worse. Mary was in such a hurry to get to her grandmother that she

sped past her flower spot. She decided to turn around, head several miles back,and cut a bunch.

Mary arrived at the hospital to find her grandmother very weak and unresponsive.She placed the flowers in the pitcher and sat down to hold her grandmother’shand. She felt a squeeze on her fingers. It was the last conversation they had.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Questions:

11)) Which is the best antonymfor deteriorate?

A. improve

B. increase C. adjust D. accumulate

22)) "She hated highway driving, findingit ugly and monotonous ."

▼Choose the best way to rewrite the abovesentence.

A. She hated highway driving,finding it ugly and tedious.

B. She hated highway driving,finding it ugly and confusing.

C. She hated highway driving,finding it ugly and nerve-wracking.

D. She hated highway driving,finding it ugly and timeconsuming.

33)) What is the best meaning of theword captivated?

A. energizedB. fascinatedC. humbledD. relaxed

44)) "They were thin and delicate and purple, almost poetic inappearance."


A. vernacular , suggesting aparticular geographical area

B. alliteration, characterized by therepetition of a letter or sound

C. foreshadowing , characterized bythe use of hints to suggest whatis to come

D. personification, characterized bya thing being described as if itwere human

55)) Which best describes what stoppingfor flowers on the side of thehighway became for Mary?

A. monotonous B. a ritual C. a regret D. torturous

66)) What other title would best fit this

passage?

A. “The Fall” B. "On the Road" C. “Wildflower Poetry” D. "Living for Tomorrow"

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



77)) Why might the author havedescribed the flowers as poetic?

A. The author wanted to depict this

passage as a poem. B. The author wanted to convey

that this type of flower had beenwritten about by poets.

C. The author wanted to contrastthe flowers with other flowersconsidered less beautiful.

D. The author wanted to conveythat Mary felt the flowers wereas beautiful as verses on apage.

88)) Using the passage as a guide, whatkind of person does Mary seem tobe?


A. □ She is impatient.

B. □ She is not the safest driver.

C. □ She is drawn to the beauty innature.

D. □ She has a deep love for hergrandmother.

99)) Which is the best antonym for lucid?

A. falseB. realisticC. obscureD. determined

1100)) What do the flowers seem to cometo signify for Mary?

A. how beautiful the highways canbe

B. an opportunity to pull off on theside of the road

C. a chance to converse with hergrandmother

D. a chance make the hospitalroom smell better

Do you have many routines? Do you like routines? Explain.

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““FFr r iieedd”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


My cell phone rings again. It is futile to ignore it anymore.

Valerie is persistent. She will continue to bedevil me until I acquiesce.

“Hello,” I answer.

“State Fair, Bobbie?” she says in her singsong voice. “When are we heading out?

Only two more days left!”

I abhor the State Fair. The boisterous crowds, the insanely long lines and theimpossibility of finding a clean restroom all combine to make this an event that Idread.

For Valerie, my best friend since the angst of middle school, the State Fair is asign that divine powers really do exist.

“Really, Bobbie, where else can you pet a cow, ride a horse, fall ten stories, seethe world’s smallest person and eat fried macaroni and cheese?” Valerie asks

gleefully.

“Hell?” I guess.

The fried food at the State Fair is a gastronomical nightmare on its own. I oncetried a fried pickle at the fair and was sick to my stomach for hours. And a frieddonut hamburger with bacon, cheese AND a greasy egg? How could that notbe deleterious to your health?

I have not seen Valerie for a good month; our schedules are both so hectic. Myhatred of the State Fair becomes inconsequential to my desire to hang with Val.

Alas, I ignore my anti-fair bias for the umpteenth year.

“Pick me up at noon,” I say and hang up the phone.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Questions:

11)) Choose the best synonym for futile.

A. arduous B. enervating C. homicidal D. ineffective

22)) What does it mean to acquiesce?

A. to give in B. to speak kindly C. to pay attention D. to answer the phone

33)) " I truly abhor the State Fair."

▼Choose the most accurate rewrite of theabove sentence.

A. I really hate the State Fair.B. I am sickened by the State Fair. C. I have no time for the State Fair.D. I am uncertain about the State

Fair.

44)) How does Valerie seem to feelabout the State Fair?

A. ambivalent B. condescending

C. jubilant D. nonchalant

55)) What does the wordgastronomical suggest?

A. relating to health risksB.

relating to worldlinessC. relating to culinary issuesD. relating to higher education

66)) " And a fried donut hamburger withbacon, cheese AND a greasyegg?"

▼ What is wrong with the above sentence?

Check all that are correct.

A. □ There is no verb.

B. □ There is no subject.

C. □ It is a sentence fragment.

D. □ There are too manydescriptions.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



77)) Why might the author have chosento capitalize all the letters in theword "and" when writing about the

donut hamburger?

A. to make sure the readerunderstood it was a list

B. to show that a greasy egg wasthe last ingredient

C. to highlight that the sentencewas written incorrectly

D. to emphasize just how manyingredients were on thehamburger

88)) Choose the best antonymfor deleterious.

A. amicable B. beneficial C. fortuitous D. pathetic

99)) How is hang used in this passage?

A. as a hyperbole, meaning as anexaggeration

B. as a slang expression, meaninginformal language

C. as an analogy, meaning acomparison between two things

D. as a denotation, meaning the

literal meaning of a word

1100)) What does the author's use of theword umpteenth suggest?

A. that the fair has been aroundfor a long time

B. that this is the last time Bobbiewill agree to go to the fair

C. that Bobbie goes to the StateFair with Val frequently

D. that this is the first time Bobbiehas agreed to go with Val

Would you like to attend the State Fair as described in the story? Explain.

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““GGaass”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


Machines need gas to work.

Cars need gas.

Buses need gas.

Airplanes need gas.

People use a lot of gas. It makes our machines work.

Questions:

11)) What needs gas to work?

A. animals B. machines C. plants

22)) Which thing needs gas to work?

A. a dog B. a truck C. a bicycle

33)) People use a lot of gas. This

means...

A. People don't use gas.B. People use a little gas.C. People use much gas.

Is gas good? Is it bad? Explain.

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““GGr r eeeenn GGr r aassss”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


Plants need sunlight and water to make their own food.

You can do an experiment to test if this is true.

Place a bucket over a patch of green grass.

After a few days, lift the bucket.

You will see that the grass is not as green anymore.

If you leave the bucket in place for a week, the grass will becomevery dull.

This happens because it cannot make food in the dark.

Remove the bucket. In a few days, the grass will start turning green again.

Questions:

11)) What is the main point of thispassage?

A. that buckets are bad

B. that plants need sunlight

C. that grass is not pretty when itis dull

22)) What is an experiment?

A. a way to grow grass B. a way to test an idea

C. a way to use a bucket

33)) What happens after a few days?

A. The grass turns brown. B. The grass gets very dull C. The grass is not as green

44)) Which is the best antonymfor dull?

A. bright B. brown C. colorful

55)) According to the passage, howlong does it take for the grass tobecome dull?

A. a month B. a week C. a few days

66)) What might happen if the bucketstays on the grass for a very longtime?

A. The grass might die. B. Flowers might start to bloom. C. The grass might start growing

again.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““GGr r iif f f f iinn’’ss TTaalleennttss”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


Griffin plays the violin.

He takes lessons after school on Tuesdays.

Griffin’s violin teacher is Mr. Thomas. Mr. Thomas tells Griffin to practice everyday.

Griffin practices his violin on most days.

On the days Griffin does not practice his violin, he plays soccer with his friends or

fixes old clocks for fun.

“You are a boy of many talents,” Griffin’s parents tell him. “That means you aregood at doing many things.”

Griffin likes when his parents say this to him.

He loves playing the violin. He loves playing soccer. He loves fixing clocks.Griffin loves to do many things, but he does not have the time to do them allevery day.

Questions:

11)) What does Griffin play?


A. □ board gamesB. □ the piano C. □ soccer D. □ the violin

22)) When does Griffin take violinlessons?

A. on Tuesdays after soccerB. on Thursdays after soccerC. on Tuesdays after schoolD. on Thursdays after school

33)) When does Mr. Thomas tell Griffinto practice?

A. every dayB. most daysC. only on TuesdaysD. when he wants to

44)) When does Griffin practice theviolin?

A. every dayB. most daysC. neverD. only on Tuesdays

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



55)) How does Griffin feel about theviolin?

A. He loves it.

B. He thinks it is hard.C. He hates to practice.D. He does not like the sound.

66)) What things does Griffin love to do?


A. □ read booksB. □ fix old clocksC. □ build birdhousesD. □ play soccer with his friends

77)) What does Mr. Thomas teachGriffin?

A. to play soccerB. to fix old clocks

C. to play the violinD. to build birdhouses

88)) What does it mean to have manytalents?

A. to want to do a lotB. to be good at playing the violin

C. to be busy doing many thingsD. to be good at doing a lot of

things

99)) How come Griffin does not play theviolin every day?

A. He does not like the violin. B. He wants to play the piano.C. He is busy doing other things.

D. His mom says not to play everyday.

Do you have a talent? What is it? Would you like to have a talent?

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““II FFllyy”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


I fly airplanes for work.I am a pilot.

Sometimes, I take my little girl with me.Her name is Bristol.Bristol likes to look out the window of the airplane.She likes to look at the clouds.She thinks the clouds look like animals.She points at one with her finger. "I see a giraffe!" she says.

I also have a little boy.My little boy does not like to be up high.He does not come with me on the airplane.He likes to play airplane with me.We play airplane when I get home.We run around the yard. We wave our arms in the air. We make airplane noises.

Questions:

11)) Who is telling this story?

A. Bristol.B. A little boy.C. A pilot.D. A friend.

22)) What does Bristol like to do in the

airplane?

A. Look out the window.B. Run in the yard.C. Sit in the back.D. Be the pilot.

33)) Bristol points at something outsidethe window. What does she pointat?

A. A giraffe.B. Her dad.C. A cloud.D. A tree.

44)) Why doesn't the little boy like to fly?

A. _______________________

__________________________

__________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

“BBeeaarrss”

Reading Comprehension – Informational Passages

Directions: Read the passage. Then answer questions about the passage below.

American Black Bears live in the U.S., Canada, and Mexico. An American Black

Bear can be up to seven feet tall if it stands on its hind legs. A mother Black Bear can have

2-4 baby bears. They have the bears in winter. The baby bears are called c cuu b b s s. D Duu r rii n n g g thewinter, the cubs stay with their mother in the bear den. During the summer, the cubs like to

go o ouu t t s sii d d ee. They like to run and play. The cubs drink milk provided by their mother. The

cubs eat nuts, berries, and insects. The cubs also love to eat honey. During the winter, thecubs sleep in the den with their mothers. They rest all winter. The cubs will l l ee a avvee theirmother the next summer. They will move away to start their own family.

Brown Bears live in the North. They live in Wyoming, Montana, Idaho,

Washington, Alaska, Canada, and northern Eurasia. Brown Bears are very big. A BrownBear can be up to ten feet tall if it stands on its hind legs. Like Black Bear cubs, Brown

Bear cubs are born in winter. They drink milk until spring or summer. The mothers have 2-

4 cubs. Brown Bear cubs stay with their mothers for 2-4 years. The adult females, called

sows, teach them to hunt. They like to hunt at night. They like to hunt in large, open s s p p a a c cee s s. Brown Bears eat mostly fruits and vegetables, but they also hunt and eat other

animals.

QQuueessttiioonnss:: 11)) WWhheenn aarree bbeeaarr ccuubbss bboorrnn??

A. WinterB.

Spring

C.

Summer

D. Fall

22)) WWhhaatt ddoo bbeeaarrss ddoo aallll wwiinntteerr?? A. They learn to hunt.

B. They run and play.C. They fish.

D. They rest.

33)) HHooww ttaallll ccaann aa BBrroowwnn BBeeaarr ggeett??

A.

Under 7 feet

B.

Up to 8 feet

C. Under 9 feet

D. Up to 10 feet

44)) BBrroowwnn BBeeaarrss lleeaavvee tthheeiirr mmootthheerrss…… A. when they are 1-2 years old.B.

when they are 2-4 years old.

C.

when they are 3-5 years old.

D. when they are 4-5 years old.

55)) WWhheerree ddoo bbllaacck k bbeeaarrss lliik k ee ttoo hhuunntt??

A.

In open spaces

B. In the woodsC.

In open spaces and in the woods

D.

In open spaces and near the water

VVooccaabbuullaarryy:: 11)) BBeeaarr c cuu b b s s aarree……

A. mother bears.

B.

baby bears.

C.

where bears rest.

D. groups of bears.

22)) WWhhaatt iiss tthhee bbeesstt ssyynnoonnyymm f f oorr d d uu r rii n n g g?? A. after

B. beforeC.

while

D. what

33)) OOuu t t s sii d d ee iiss……

A. a place where bears hunt.

B.

a place that is in the woods.

C. a place that is not enclosed by walls.

D. a place that does not receive sunlight.

44)) WWhheenn yyoouu l l ee a avvee,, yyoouu…… D. go homeE.

go to sleep

F.

go away

D. go back

55)) WWhhaatt aarree ooppeenn s s p p a a c cee s s??

A Big places with many trees

B. Big grassy areasC.

Small places with tall trees

D. Small grassy areas

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

“BBeeddss”



A long time ago, people didn’t sleep in beds. Ten thousand years ago, people

probably slept on leaves and animal furs.

Long ago in Egypt, people ate, slept, and talked to friends in bed. Over 3,000years ago, King Tut of Egypt had a beautiful bed made of wood and gold! But c c o o m m m m o o n n

people in Egypt slept on beds of grass and leaves.

In the 16th

c cee n n t tuu r r y y, in the 1500’s, people piled bird feathers or straw on ropewebs. Later, people made m m a a t t t t r ree s s s see s s by stuffing feathers inside large cotton bags.

Louis 14th, king of France from 1643 until 1715, had 413 beds. He liked to talk to

his friends and do his work in bed. He liked beautiful beds.

In 1865, people started to put springs under their mattress to make it more

f f l l ee x xii b bl l ee . . This would make it bend and flex when the sleeper moved. By the 1930’s, most

beds had springs. About 100 years after people started to put springs under their mattress,

the modern waterbed was ii n nvvee n n t tee d d .

Today there are different kinds of beds. Some people have waterbeds. Some sleepon mats. Others sleep on foam mattresses or airbeds.

QQuueessttiioonnss:: 11)) KKiinngg TTuutt aanndd LLoouuiiss 1144

tthh bbootthh hhaadd……

A.

springs in their beds.

B. beds made of fur.

C. beautiful beds.D.

many beds.

22)) HHooww mmaannyy bbeeddss ddiidd LLoouuiiss 1144tthh

hhaavvee??

A. 3,000

B. 1,715

C. 1,643D.

413

33)) WWhhoo lliik k eedd ttoo ttaallk k iinn bbeedd??

A.

Egyptian people

B. French people

C. The king of FranceD.

Both A and C are correct.

44)) TThhee mmooddeerrnn wwaatteerrbbeedd wwaass iinnvveenntteedd iinn……

A.

the 1830’s.

B. the 1860’s.C.

the 1930’s.

D.

the 1960’s.

55)) WWhhaatt ddoo ppeeooppllee sslleeeepp oonn nnooww??

A.

Foam mattresses

B. WaterbedsC.

Airbeds

D.

All of the above

VVooccaabbuullaarryy:: 11)) TThhee bbeesstt ssyynnoonnyymm f f oorr c c o o m m m m o o n n iiss……

A.

rich.

B. sleepy.

C. ordinary.D.

important.

22)) AA c cee n n t tuu r r y y iiss……

A. 1 year.

B. 10 years.

C. 100 years.D.

1000 years.

33)) M M a a t t t t r ree s s s see s s aarree……

A.

mats filled with something soft.

B. wooden frames for beds.

C. types of rope.D.

kings.

44)) SSoommeetthhiinngg f f l l ee x xii b bl l ee……

A.

sleeps very easily.

B. sleeps a lot.C.

bends and flexes.

D.

looks beautiful.

55)) WWhheenn ssoommeetthhiinngg iiss ii n nvvee n n t tee d d iitt iiss……

A.

made of something soft.

B. built of wood and gold.C.

made for the first time.

D.

built with springs.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

“BBeeeess”



Bees are insects. Bees are s s p pee c cii a al l insects because they can f f l l y y! They can move

through the air like an airplane! Bees can fly because they have wings. They use their

wings to fly. Bees can fly fast. Bees can also fly slow. They can fly up and they can flydown. They need to fly to get to the flowers!

Bees can have three colors. They can be yellow, red, and orange. All bees are

black in some places.Bees have three main parts. They have a head. They have a body. And, they have

a stinger. The stinger is used to d d ee f f ee n n d d against enemies. They also have six legs. They

use their legs to stand and climb. They also use their legs to eat and collect pollen.

Bees live in many places. They live in Africa, Australia, Asia, Europe, NorthAmerica, South America. The only c c o o n n t tii n nee n n t t that bees do not live on is Antarctica! I

understand why they don’t live in Antarctica. It’s too cold!

Most of the time, bees are nice to humans. If you do not b b o o t t h hee r r them, they will

not bother you. Have fun watching the bees this summer!

QQuueessttiioonnss::

11)) WWhhaatt aarree bbeeeess??

A. MammalsB.

Birds

C.

Reptiles

D. Insects

22)) HHooww ddoo bbeeeess f f llyy??

A. They use their legs.B.

They use their head.

C.

They use their wings.

D. None of the above.

33)) HHooww mmaannyy lleeggss ddoo bbeeeess hhaavvee??

A. TwoB.

Four

C.

Six

D. Eight

44)) WWhhaatt iiss tthhee ssttiinnggeerr uusseedd f f oorr??

A. To eat food.B.

To defend against enemies.

C. Both A and B.


55)) WWhheerree ddoo bbeeeess lliivvee??

A.

North America

B.

Asia

C. Antarctica

D. Both A and B

VVooccaabbuullaarryy::

11)) BBeeeess aarree s s p pee c cii a al l .. TThhiiss mmeeaannss……

A. bees are normal.

B. bees are regular.C.

bees are unusual.

D.

bees are average.

22)) BBeeeess ccaann f f l l y y.. TThhiiss mmeeaannss……

A. bees can move through the air.B. bees can dig in the ground.C.

bees can see very far.

D. bees can swim through the water.

33)) WWhhaatt iiss tthhee ooppppoossiittee oof f d d ee f f ee n n d d ??

A. Run

B. HideC.

Protect

D. Attack

44)) WWhhaatt iiss aa c c o o n n t tii n nee n n t t??

A. A large piece of connected land.B.

A large river.

C.

A small part of the ocean.

D. A swamp.

55)) IIf f yyoouu b b o o t t h hee r r ssoommeetthhiinngg,, yyoouu……

A. make it angry.B.

make it get upset.

C.

make it mad.

D. All of the above.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

“DDooggss”



There are wild dogs and p pee t t dogs. Pet dogs are helpers and friends to people. There were no pet dogs

15,000 years ago. Men and women learned how to work with dogs. Dogs helped humans travel from Asia to

North America 10,000 years ago by p puul l l l ii n n g g sleds in the snow. People say dogs are “man’s best friend.”They help with farming. They help with hunting. They help with fishing. They can pull things for people.

They can help find things.

There are many colors of dogs. There are white dogs, gray dogs, black dogs, and brown dogs. Adog’s f f uu r r can be short or long. Dogs have curly hair or s s t t r r a aii g g h h t t fur. There are very small dogs. They are

only 6-8 inches tall. There are very big dogs. They are about 3 feet tall.

Some dogs can see well. Some dogs do not see very well. All dogs can hear well. They can hear

sounds that people cannot hear. They can hear high sounds and low sounds. They can hear sound very faraway. All dogs can smell very well. They can smell 40 times better than h huu m m a a n n s s!

Dogs live 5 to 13 years, but some dogs live much longer. One dog lived to be 24 years old!

QQuueessttiioonnss:: 11)) DDooggss hheellppeedd ppeeooppllee ggoo ttoo AAmmeerriiccaa bbyy……

A. pulling sleds in the snow.B.

helping with farming.

C.

helping find things.


22)) HHooww ttaallll aarree tthhee ssmmaalllleesstt ddooggss??

A. 3 inchesB.

5 inches

C. 6 inches

D. 13 inches.

33)) HHooww ttaallll aarree tthhee bbiiggggeesstt ddooggss??

A.

1 foot

B.

2 feet

C. 3 feet

D. 5 feet

44)) WWhhaatt ccaann aallll ddooggss ddoo wweellll??

A.

see

B.

hear

C. smellD.

Both B and C are correct

55)) HHooww oolldd wwaass tthhee oollddeesstt ddoogg??

A.

5 years old

B. 10 years old

C. 13 years oldD.

24 years old

VVooccaabbuullaarryy:: 11)) TThhee bbeesstt aannttoonnyymm f f oorr p pee t t iiss……

A. wild animal.B.

domestic animal.

C.

large animal.

D. friendly animal.

22)) TThhee ooppppoossiittee oof f p puul l l l iiss……

A. receive.

B.

carry.

C. push.

D. help.

33)) AA ddoogg’’ss f f uu r r iiss tthhee ddoogg’’ss……

A.

nose

B.

eyes

C. hair

D. ears

44)) SS t t r r a aii g g h h t t hhaaiirr iiss……

A.

curly.

B.

long.

C. brown.D.

not curly.

55)) AAnnootthheerr wwoorrdd f f oorr h huu m m a a n n iiss……

A.

dog.

B. animal.

C. sound.

D.

person.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

“FFiisshh”

Reading Comprehension – Informational Passages (4)


There are many k kii n n d d s s of fish. There are big fish, small fish, long fish, and short fish. People knowabout 25,000 different kinds of fish. There are probably 15,000 kinds of fish that people do not know about.

There are many c c o ol l o o r r s s of fish. There are red fish, blue fish, yellow fish, and white fish.

Fish do not all eat the same things. Some fish eat f f l l iiee s s or other bugs. Some eat plants like seaweed.Some eat worms. Some fish eat other fish.

The fastest fish can swim almost 70 miles per hour. That’s fast!

The heaviest fish wweeii g g h h s s 15 tons. That’s very heavy!The longest fish are sharks. Sharks can be 50 feet long. That’s very long!

The smallest fish is less than 1/3 inch long. That’s very small!

Fish can see, feel, and taste. Some fish can smell. Some can hear sounds in the water. Fish can feel

p p a aii n n. When they get hurt, it feels bad.


11)) HHooww mmaannyy k k iinnddss oof f f f iisshh ddoo ppeeooppllee k k nnooww aabboouutt??

A.

10,000

B.

15,000

C. 25,000

D. 40,000

22)) TThheerree aarree mmaannyy……

A. kinds of fishB.

sizes of fish

C. colors of fishD.

All of the above

33)) HHooww f f aasstt ccaann tthhee f f aasstteesstt f f iisshh sswwiimm??

A.

10 miles per hour

B. 20 miles per hour

C. 40 miles per hourD.

70 miles per hour

44)) HHooww lloonngg ccaann sshhaarrk k ss bbee??

A.

40 feet

B. 50 feet

C. 60 feetD.

70 feet

55)) HHooww mmuucchh ddooeess tthhee hheeaavviieesstt f f iisshh wweeiigghh??

A.

15 pounds

B. 150 pounds

C. 15 tonsD.

150 tons

VVooccaabbuullaarryy:: 11)) AA wwoorrdd tthhaatt mmeeaannss tthhee ssaammee tthhiinngg aass tthhee

wwoorrdd ““ k kii n n d d ”” iiss……

A.

type.

B.

color.

C. name.

D. number.

22)) AAnn eexxaammppllee oof f aa c c o ol l o o r r iiss……

A.

big.B.

red.

C. long.D.

kind.

33)) F Fl l iiee s s aarree……

A. fish.

B. bugs.

C. plants.

D.

worms.

44)) W W eeii g g h h t t iiss aa mmeeaassuurree oof f hhooww……

A. tall something is.

B. heavy something is.

C. fast something is.

D.

smart something is.

55)) P P a aii n n iiss ……

A.

a bad feeling.

B. a big fish.

C. a sound.D.

a taste.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

“FFllaaggss”



The first flags were probably in China. People flew flags in China over 4,000 years ago. Each

part of the army had its own flag so the soldiers could see their leaders. Early flags were sticks of wood.

They had pictures cut into the wood.Iran had metal flags about 3,000 years ago. Old Greek coins show pictures of flags. People in

Rome also used flags over 2,000 years ago. People first made flags of c cl l o o t t h h about 2,000 years ago.

Those flags looked like today’s flags.Flags are important at sea. Most s s h hii p p s s fly their own country’s flag and the flag of the country

they are visiting. When a ship flies only its own flag, it is ready to fight.

Every country now has a flag. Every U.S. state has a flag. Clubs, teams, and schools have flags.

The Olympics has a flag. The Olympics flag has five rings of five colors. Each ring stands for, or

r ree p p r ree s see n n t t s s, a continent. It means that people from five c c o o n n t tii n nee n n t t s s – Africa, Asia, Europe, North

America, and South America – come to play.

Railway lines also use flags. Railway flags t teel l l l the trains what to do. For example, a red flag tells

the train to stop, just like a stop sign. A blue, white, or green flag tells the train that it can go. A blue flagon the side of a train means someone is working on the train. It means nobody can move the train.

QQuueessttiioonnss:: 11)) TThhee f f iirrsstt f f llaaggss wweerree mmaaddee oof f ……

A. woodB.

cloth

C.

rings

D. metal

22)) HHooww mmaannyy f f llaaggss ddoo mmoosstt sshhiippss f f llyy??

A. 0B.

1

C.

2

D. 3

33)) TThhee OOllyymmppiiccss f f llaagg hhaass……

A. five ringsB.

five colors

C.

five countries

D. Both A and B are correct.

44)) AA wwhhiittee f f llaagg tteellllss aa ttrraaiinn tthhaatt……

A. it can go.B.

it should stop.

C. it has to be careful.

D. nobody can move the train.

55)) PPeeooppllee f f lleeww tthhee f f iirrsstt f f llaaggss……

A.

less than 2,000 years ago.

B.

about 2,000 years ago.

C. about 3,000 years ago

D. more than 4,000 years ago.

VVooccaabbuullaarryy:: 11)) AAnnootthheerr wwoorrdd f f oorr c cl l o o t t h h iiss……

A. color.

B.

fabric.

C.

metal.

D. wood.

22)) SS h hii p p s s aarree……

A. boats.B.

coins.

C.

flags.

D. teams.

33)) AAnnootthheerr wwaayy ttoo ssaayy r ree p p r ree s see n n t t s s iiss……

A. flies.B. visits.

C. works on.

D. stands for.

44)) C C o o n n t tii n nee n n t t s s aarree……

A. countries.B.

kinds of games.

C. large pieces of land.

D. pictures cut in wood.

55)) IIf f yyoouu t teel l l l ssoommeeoonnee iinnf f oorrmmaattiioonn yyoouu……

A.

receive information from them.

B.

want information from them.

C. take information from them.

D. give information to them.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

“FFrrooggss”



Frogs live on land and in water. Frogs have long back legs and short bodies. Their

eyes stick out. They do not have tails. Most of the time they move in the water, but they canalso move on land. Frogs have s s m m o o o o t t h h, not bumpy, skin. They can breathe through their skin.

Their skin must stay wet so they can breathe through it. Young frogs must breathe through

their skin. Older frogs grow l l uu n n g g s s. They breathe through their lungs when they are on land, just like people do. Frogs lay their eggs in p p o o n n d d s s and other bodies of water, like lakes.

Frogs must move fast to catch something to eat. They must also get away from bigger

animals. Some frogs have webs of skin between their toes. Webbed toes are good because it

helps them to swim very fast. Tree frogs have toe pads. The toe pads help them h h a a n n g g o o n n when they c cl l ii m m b b. When they climb, they move up trees or rocks. Some tree frogs live high in

very tall trees. Those tree frogs have webs between their toes. They can jump from tree to

tree. They can’t fly, but they can stay in the air for a long jump.

QQuueessttiioonnss:: 11)) AA yyoouunngg f f rroogg’’ss ssk k iinn mmuusstt ssttaayy wweett ssoo……

A. the frog can swim.

B. the frog can climbC.

the frog can lay eggs.

D. the frog can breathe.

22)) WWhheerree ddoo f f rrooggss llaayy tthheeiirr eeggggss??

A. In water

B.

On landC.

In trees

D. Under rocks

33)) HHooww aarree yyoouunngg aanndd oolldd f f rrooggss ddiif f f f eerreenntt??

A. Only older frogs have lungs.B.

Only young frogs can swim.

C.

Only young frogs can live in water.

D. Only older frogs must have wet skin.

44)) SSoommee f f rrooggss hhaavvee ttooee ppaaddss ttoo hheellpp tthheemm......

A. climb.B.

swim.

C.

jump.

D. fly.

55)) WWhhaatt hheellppss f f rrooggss sswwiimm aanndd j juummpp??

A. Toe padsB.

Their lungs

C.

Their smooth skin

D. Webs of skin between their toes

VVooccaabbuullaarryy:: 11)) SS m m o o o o t t h h ssk k iinn iiss……

A. not bumpy.

B. not wet.C.

bumpy.

D. wet.

22)) PPeeooppllee aanndd f f rrooggss bbootthh uussee l l uu n n g g s s ttoo……

A. climb.

B.

move fast.C.

breathe.

D. get something to eat.

33)) P P o o n n d d s s aarree……

A. small frogs.B.

frog eggs.

C.

large animals

D. bodies of water.

44)) TToo h h a a n n g g o o n n mmeeaannss ttoo……

A. fall down.B.

hold on.

C.

go on.


55)) TToo c cl l ii m m b b mmeeaannss ttoo……

A. move fast.B.

take in.

C.

move up.

D. move in.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date_______________

“HHoouusseess”



There are houses all over the world. Some houses are large. Some are small. Some are made of wood.

Some are made of rock. Some are made of mud. Some are made of cloth. In cold places, some houses are made ofii c cee – frozen water! People usually build their houses with something that is easy to find. For example, there are

many trees in a forest. So people who live there might build a house made of logs.

Some houses have one room. Some houses have many rooms. There is usually a bedroom for sleeping.There is often a k kii t t c c h hee n n for cooking. There is usually a bathroom. There is often a living room for sitting andtalking. Some houses have basements. The basement is under the main part of the house. Some houses have attics

The a a t t t tii c c is above the main part of the house. Most houses have a door so people can enter and exit the house.

Most houses have windows so the people can look outside. Windows also let air into the house from outdoors.Some houses are f f a a n n c c y y. They are painted bright colors, and are very decorative. Some houses not fancy ––

they are plain and simple. Houses look very different in different parts of the world. But, people who live in a

house probably all a a g g r reeee that there is no place like home!

QQuueessttiioonnss:: 11)) WWhhyy aarree mmaannyy f f oorreesstt hhoouusseess mmaaddee oof f

llooggss??

A. There are many logs in the forest.B.

Trees are easy to find in the forest.

C. There is a lot of wood in the forest.

D. All of the above

22)) WWhhyy ddoo hhoouusseess hhaavvee bbeeddrroooommss??

A. For sleepingB.

For cooking

C. For relaxing

D. For building things

33)) WWhheerree iiss tthhee bbaasseemmeenntt oof f aa hhoouussee??

A.

Beside the house

B.

Above the house

C. Under the house


44)) HHoouusseess hhaavvee ddoooorrss……

A.

so people can enter and exit.

B.

so people can sleep.

C. so people can cook and eat.D.

Both A and B are correct.

55)) HHoouusseess hhaavvee wwiinnddoowwss ttoo……

A.

let people go outside.

B.

let people look outside.

C. let air into the house from outdoors.D.

Both B and C are correct.

VVooccaabbuullaarryy:: 11)) WWhhaatt iiss ii c cee??

A. Trees that are cut down

B. Water that is frozenC.

A kind of grass

D. A kind of cloth

22)) AA k kii t t c c h hee n n iiss aa……

A. room for sleeping.

B.

room for cooking.C.

room which is under a house.

D. room which is above a house.

33)) AAnn a a t t t tii c c iiss……

A. a house made of ice.B.

a house in the forest.

C.

a room under a house.

D. a room above a house.

44)) IIf f ssoommeetthhiinngg iiss f f a a n n c c y y,, iitt iiss……

A. bright and decorative.B.

plain and simple.

C.

ugly.

D. old and tarnished.

55)) IIf f ppeeooppllee a a g g r reeee,, tthheeyy……

A. decide to do something.B.

feel the same way about something.

C.

live in the same house.

D. do something together.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

“HHuummaannss”



The human body has many parts. People have two arms and two legs. We have

two hands and two feet. We have five f f ii n n g gee r r s s on each hand. We have five toes on eachfoot.

We each have two eyes on our f f a a c cee. We see with our eyes. We each have two

ears. We hear with our ears. We each have one nose on our face. We smell with our nose.We each have one t t o o n n g guuee. We taste with our tongue. We each have one brain. We thinkwith our brain. We each have two l l uu n n g g s s in our chest. We breathe with our lungs.

Humans can do many things. People can walk. We use our legs and feet to walk.

We can run. Running is faster than walking. We use our legs and feet to run. We canclimb. We use our arms, hands, legs and feet to c cl l ii m m b b. We can climb up trees or climb up

ladders. We can eat and drink. We use our mouth and teeth to eat. We eat meat, fruit,

vegetables, and other foods. We can drink lots of things, but we drink water the most. We

also use our mouth and teeth to talk.

QQuueessttiioonnss:: 11)) EEaacchh hhuummaann hhaass f f iivvee……

A.

feet on each leg.

B. toes on each foot.

C. hands on each arm.D.


22)) HHooww mmaannyy eeaarrss ddooeess eeaacchh hhuummaann hhaavvee??

A. 1

B. 2

C. 5D.

10

33)) WWhhaatt ddoo wwee ssmmeellll wwiitthh??

A.

Our toes

B. Our nose

C. Our lungsD.

Our fingers

44)) WWee uussee oouurr lleeggss ttoo……

A.

run.

B. walk.C.

climb.

D.

All of the above

55)) WWhhaatt ddoo hhuummaannss eeaatt??

A.

Meat

B. WaterC.

Ladders

D.

Coffee

VVooccaabbuullaarryy:: 11)) F Fii n n g gee r r s s aarree ppaarrtt oof f yyoouurr……

A.

leg

B. foot

C. noseD.

hand

22)) YYoouurr f f a a c cee hhaass yyoouurr……

A. eyes, nose and mouth.

B. arms, legs and feet.

C. fingers and toes.D.

feet and toes.

33)) YYoouurr t t o o n n g guuee iiss ppaarrtt oof f yyoouurr……

A.

ear.

B. nose.

C. chest.D.

mouth.

44)) YYoouu uussee yyoouurr l l uu n n g g s s ttoo……

A.

eat.

B. hear.C.

smell.

D.

breathe.

55)) TToo c cl l ii m m b b iiss ttoo……

A.

go in.

B. go up.

C.

taste food.

D.

drink water.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


englishforeveryone.org Name_______________

Date_______________

“IIccee FFiisshhiinngg”



The first tip for a good day of ice fishing is to wear the right clothes. You should dress in layers. Wear 2 or

shirts, so you can take off a layer when you are warm. Wear a face mask, a warm hat with ear flaps over your earand warm gloves and boots.

The second tip is to stay warm. Some people put up cloth t tee n n t t s s when they go ice fishing. Some people own

small ice houses where they can stay warm. You can use a small heater inside the tent or outside on the ice. Be surto take a hot drink like hot chocolate. You should move around to stay warm. Some people take ice skates.

The third tip is to c c h hee c c k k the ice. Look at it carefully. The ice must be 4 or more inches thick. This is the ice

rule: “Thick and blue, tried and true. Thin and crispy, way too r rii s s k k y y.” Thick ice is safe for ice fishing. Thin ice is

dangerous.The fourth tip is to take the right tools. You need to drill a hole in the ice with an ice drill. Then make the

hole bigger with a chopping tool, like an ax. You need to carry your b b a aii t t in a bait bucket. Use worms or small fish

for bait. You need a chair to sit on. Take a f f o ol l d d ii n n g g chair so you can carry it easily. Be sure to take your fish hooks

and fishing rod! Pull all your tools on a sled. Take your cell phone. You might need to call for help.The fifth tip is to have a great time!

QQuueessttiioonnss:: 11)) YYoouu nneeeedd eeaarr f f llaappss oovveerr yyoouurr eeaarrss ttoo……

A.

keep water out of your ears.

B. protect your ears from noise.

C. keep your ears warm.D.


22)) YYoouu sshhoouulldd mmoovvee aarroouunndd ttoo……

A.

keep warm in the cold weather.

B.

keep from falling in the water.

C. scare the large animals away.D.

make the fish come to you.

33)) HHooww sshhoouulldd yyoouu cchheecck k tthhee iiccee??

A.

Look at the ice carefully.

B. Chop a hole in the ice.

C. Drill a hole in the ice.D.

Skate on the ice.

44)) WWhhaatt ccaann yyoouu uussee f f oorr bbaaiitt??

A.

Hot chocolate

B. Small fish

C. WormsD.

Both B and C are correct.

55)) HHooww tthhiicck k mmuusstt tthhee iiccee bbee??

A.

2 inches

B. 3 inchesC.

4 inches

D.

5 inches

VVooccaabbuullaarryy:: 11)) T T ee n n t t s s aarree……

A.

hats

B. boots

C. heatersD.

shelters

22)) AAnnootthheerr wwaayy ttoo ssaayy c c h hee c c k k iiss……

A. look over carefully.

B. cut with an ax.

C. follow the rule.D. use the right tool.

33)) SSoommeetthhiinngg tthhaatt iiss r rii s s k k y y iiss……

A.

safe.

B. thick.

C. crispy.D.

dangerous.

44)) WWhhaatt iiss b b a aii t t??

A.

Something the fish want to eat

B. A kind of pail or bucket

C. Something to sit onD.

None of the above.

55)) AA f f o ol l d d ii n n g g cchhaaiirr iiss aa cchhaaiirr tthhaatt……

A.

you should take ice fishing.

B. you can fold to make smaller.C.

you can carry easily.

D.

All of the above.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

“LLeeoonnaarrddoo ddaa VViinnccii”



Leonardo da Vinci was born in 1452 in the area of Florence, Italy. He did many things. He was a

scientist. He was an ii n nvvee n n t t o o r r - he made new things. He was a musician. He was a mathematician. He was an

a a r r c c h hii t tee c c t t – he knew how to plan the construction of buildings. He knew about animals. He knew about plants.He could do many things well. He was very t t a al l ee n n t tee d d .

He was famous for his painting. He painted the Mona Lisa and The Last Supper. They are his mostfamous paintings. Many people know about them. He started working on The Last Supper in 1495 in Milan. He

finished it in 1498. He started working on the Mona Lisa in 1503 in Italy. He finished it a short time before he

died. It is now in France.

Leonardo’s paintings were very good. He understood how bodies worked. He knew how happy or sadpeople looked. He knew how ee m m o o t tii o o n n looked on people’s faces. He understood nature, light, and shadow. His

paintings looked real.

Leonardo had many ideas for inventions. He drew plans for a helicopter. He drew plans for a tank. Hehad an idea for a calculator. He had an idea for making s s o ol l a a r r power, which is power that comes from the sun.

Leonardo lived at the same time as Michelangelo and Raphael. He was 27 years older thanMichelangelo. He was 31 years older than Raphael. Leonardo died in 1519.

QQuueessttiioonnss:: 11)) WWhheenn ddiidd LLeeoonnaarrddoo ssttaarrtt tthhee MMoonnaa LLiissaa??

A.

1495

B.

1498

C. 1503

D. 1519

22)) WWhheerree iiss tthhee MMoonnaa LLiissaa nnooww??

A. In Florence

B.

In France

C. In MilanD.

None of the above

33)) WWhhaatt wwaass oonnee oof f LLeeoonnaarrddoo’’ss ttaalleennttss??

A.

He could dance.

B. He was a pilot.

C. He could cook.D. He knew math.

44)) WWhhaatt wwaass oonnee oof f LLeeoonnaarrddoo’’ss iiddeeaass?? A.

He drew plans for a helicopter.

B. He made drawings of a TV.

C. He got power from plants.D.

He built a zoo.

55)) LLeeoonnaarrddoo wwaass 2277 yyeeaarrss oollddeerr tthhaann……

A.

Raphael.

B. Aristotle.C.

Socrates.

D.

Michelangelo.

VVooccaabbuullaarryy:: 11)) AAnn ii n nvvee n n t t o o r r iiss ssoommeeoonnee wwhhoo……

A.

knows about math.

B.

makes power.

C. makes new things.

D. understands light and shadow.

22)) AAnn a a r r c c h hii t tee c c t t iiss aa ppeerrssoonn wwhhoo……

A.

can play music.

B.

plans buildings.

C. invents new machines.D.

paints beautiful paintings.

33)) AAnnyy ppeerrssoonn wwhhoo iiss t t a al l ee n n t tee d d ……

A.

can do something well.

B. understands shadow.

C. can fly a helicopter.D.

makes solar power.

44)) TThhee bbeesstt ssyynnoonnyymm f f oorr ee m m o o t tii o o n n s s

iiss…… A.

health.

B. shadows.

C. feelings.D.

None of the above.

55)) WWhhaatt iiss aannootthheerr wwaayy ttoo ssaayy s s o ol l a a r r??

A.

Related to talent

B. Related to natureC.

Related to the sun

D.

Related to painting

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

“SSooddaa PPoopp”



Soda pop has an interesting story. The story begins with mineral water. Mineral water comes from

springs. In many places, people take b b a a t t h h s s in mineral water. They say washing with mineral water is good fortheir health. Some say drinking mineral water is also good for people.

Mineral water has bubbles in it. People learned to make b buu b b b bl l y y water in the 1770’s. They added CO2 towater with a machine to make the water bubbly. The machine was the “soda fountain.” They called the new

bubbly water “soda water” or “ c c a a r r b b o o n n a a t tee d d water.”

American drug stores sold soda water. Druggists put good-tasting flavors in the soda water. Peopledrank soda water for their health. Many people liked it for its good f f l l a avv o o r r. Many people went to the soda

fountain every day. Most soda fountains were in drug stores or ice cream shops.

In the early 1900’s, people bought soda water in bottles. Later in the 1900’s, people started to buyflavored soda water in cans. Now it is sold in many containers in g g r r o o c cee r r y y stores and other places where food is

sold. Some people call it “pop.” Some say “soda.” Other people call it “cola,” “tonic,” or “soda pop.”


11)) PPeeooppllee ssaaiidd mmiinneerraall wwaatteerr bbaatthhss wweerree……

A.

good for people’s health.

B.

best in the spring time.

C. good–tasting.D.


22)) WWhhaatt wwaass aa ssooddaa f f oouunnttaaiinn??

A.

A drug store

B.

A bath machineC. A machine which made ice creamD. A machine which made bubbly water

33)) AAtt f f iirrsstt,, AAmmeerriiccaannss bboouugghhtt ssooddaa wwaatteerr……

A.

at ice cream shops.

B. at grocery stores.

C. at drug stores.D. Both A and C are correct.

44)) WWhheerree ddooeess mmiinneerraall wwaatteerr ccoommee f f rroomm??

A.

Soda fountains

B. Ice machines

C. MachinesD.

Springs

55)) ““SSooddaa”” aanndd ““ppoopp”” aarree……

A.

both mineral water.

B. both soda water.

C. the same thing.D. Both B and C are correct.

VVooccaabbuullaarryy::

11)) B B a a t t h hii n n g g iiss……

A.

drinking water.

B. washing with water.

C. selling bubbly water.D.

putting bubbles in water.

22)) B Buu b b b bl l y y wwaatteerr iiss……

A. good tasting.

B.

a drug.C. fizzy.D. cold.

33)) C C a a r r b b o o n n a a t tee d d wwaatteerr iiss wwaatteerr wwiitthh……

A.

CO2.

B.

bubbles.

C. good-tasting things added.

DD..


44)) AA f f l l a avv o o r r iiss……

A. ice cream.B. a drink.

C. a taste.D. soda.

5) GG r r o o c cee r r y y ssttoorreess aarree……

A.

drug stores.

B. food stores.

C. soda fountains.D.

ice cream shops.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

“TTeeaa”



People drink a lot of tea. There are many kinds of tea. There is black tea. There is

green tea. There is white tea. There is red tea. There is yellow tea.People drink a lot of tea in China. Some people drink it because it is good for

them. It makes them h hee a al l t t h h y y. Other people drink it because it tastes very good. It tastes

d d eel l ii c cii o ouu s s. People drink a lot of green tea in Japan. People drink a lot of green tea inKorea too. In Vietnam, some people drink coffee b bee f f o o r ree they drink tea. People drink a lotof tea in England. Every afternoon, English people drink tea. English people a a d d d d milk to

their tea. Finally, many people drink tea in the U.S. In the South, people drink “sweet

tea.” SSwweeee t t tea is cold black tea with sugar.Most tea comes from China. Some tea comes from India or Sri Lanka. Kenya,

Japan, and Indonesia also grow a lot of tea.

QQuueessttiioonnss:: 11)) SSoommee tteeaa iiss……

A.

purple.

B. green.

C. pink.D.

blue.

22)) PPeeooppllee ddrriinnk k ccoof f f f eeee bbeef f oorree tteeaa iinn……

A. China.

B. Korea.

C.

England.D.

Vietnam.

33)) PPeeooppllee aadddd mmiillk k ttoo tthheeiirr tteeaa iinn……

A.

India.

B. England.C.

Vietnam.

D.

Sri Lanka.

44)) PPeeooppllee ddrriinnk k ““sswweeeett tteeaa”” iinn……

A. The Southern U.S.

B. The Northern U.S.C.

Vietnam.

D.

Korea.

E. Sri Lanka

55)) MMoosstt tteeaa ccoommeess f f rroomm……

A. Indonesia.B.

Kenya.

C.

Japan.

D. China.

VVooccaabbuullaarryy:: 11)) TTeeaa mmaak k eess tthheemm h hee a al l t t h h y y.. SSoo,, tteeaa……

A.

tastes good.

B. is many colors.

C. is good for them.D.

comes from many places.

22)) TThhiinnggss tthhaatt aarree d d eel l ii c cii o ouu s s……

A. are green.

B. are yellow.

C.

taste very good.D.

are good for you.

33)) B Bee f f o o r ree mmeeaannss……

A.

in front of.

B. during.C.

earlier or sooner than.

D.

Both A and C are correct.

44)) IIf f yyoouu a a d d d d mmiillk k ttoo tteeaa,, yyoouu……

A. put milk in your tea.

B. take milk out of your tea.C.

drink milk after tea.

D.

drink milk before tea.

55)) SSoommeetthhiinngg s swweeee t t……

A. is good for you.

B. has sugar in it.C.

tastes bad.

D.

is yellow.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



Date________________

“TTeennnniiss”

Reading Comprehension – Informational Passages(4)


Tennis is a sport played between two players (singles) or between two teams of

two players (doubles). Each player uses a tennis racket to s s t t r rii k kee a h h o ol l l l o oww rubber ballcovered with felt. To win, you must hit the ball into the opponent’s court without the

o o p p p p o o n nee n n t t being able to hit the ball back.

Tennis o o r rii g gii n n a a t tee d d in the United Kingdom in the late 19th

century. At first, peopleplayed tennis on courts made of grass! These were called “lawn courts”. Now, tennis is

played by millions of people all over the world. The rules of tennis have changed verylittle since it was created in the 1890s.

Most tennis players play tennis because it is fun. It also is a good way to get

exercise. While playing tennis, you do a a l l o o t t of running. You move your arms and legs in

many ways that they do not normally move.


11)) WWhhaatt ddoo yyoouu uussee ttoo hhiitt aa tteennnniiss bbaallll??

A.

A bat

B. A striker

C. A racketD.

None of the above

22)) __________ ppeeooppllee ccaann ppllaayy tteennnniiss aatt oonnccee..

A. One

B. Two

C.

FourD.

Both B and C

33)) WWhheerree ddiidd tteennnniiss oorriiggiinnaattee??

A.

Australia

B. AsiaC.

The United States

D.

The United Kingdom

44)) WWhheenn ddiidd ppeeooppllee ssttaarrtt ppllaayyiinngg tteennnniiss??

A. The late 18th

century.

B.

The late 19

th

century.C.

The late 1800s.

D.

Both B and C.

55)) WWhhyy ddoo mmoosstt ppeeooppllee ppllaayy tteennnniiss??

A. Because it is fun.

B. Because they want to win.C.

Because they don’t have a basketball.

D. Both A and B

VVooccaabbuullaarryy:: 11)) IIf f yyoouu s s t t r rii k kee ssoommeetthhiinngg,, yyoouu……

A.

hit it.

B. smash it.

C. hold it.D.

cross it out.

22)) AA tteennnniiss bbaallll iiss h h o ol l l l o oww.. TThhiiss mmeeaannss……

A. it is solid.

B. is filled with water.

C.

it has air inside it.D.

None of the above.

33)) WWhhaatt iiss tthhee ooppppoossiittee oof f o o p p p p o o n nee n n t t??

A.

Enemy

B. TeammateC.

Ally

D.

Both B and C

44)) TThhee ppaassssaaggee ttaallk k ss aabboouutt wwhheerree tteennnniiss o o r rii g gii n n a a t tee d d .. SSoo,, tthhee ppaassssaaggee ttaallk k ss aabboouutt……

A.

where tennis came from.B.

how tennis is played.

C.

how tennis is scored.

D. Both B and C.

55)) YYoouu ddoo a a l l o o t t oof f rruunnnniinngg iinn tteennnniiss.. TThhiiss

mmeeaannss yyoouu……

A.

do a good deal of running.

B. need to run very much.

C. need to run very frequently.D.

All of the above.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““JJuusstt OOnnee TToouucchh”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


I am sitting in a chair next to Momma’s bed. I am watching her get ready for aparty.

She opens the beautiful jewelry box on her nightstand.

It is the size of a shoebox. It is wooden. It has colorful stones on top. They arered, green, yellow and blue. To me, the box looks magical. It looks like it hasspecial powers.

“Now, you know you must never touch this box, right?” Momma says. I feel likeshe knows exactly what I am thinking.

I just want to touch it. I just want to open it.I just want to try on all the jewelry inside and dance aroundthe room!

“Yes, Momma,” I say. “I know.”

What do I know?

I know Momma has always told me not to touch the box. She has said it since Iwas a little girl.

“You are not old enough to wear my jewelry,” Momma says.

I am 11-years-old now! What is the big deal ?

I know that when Momma puts on the rings and bracelets from the box, she looksdifferent. She seems to glow.

There is one necklace with a yellow stone like a tiger’s eye. When Momma putsthis on, she seems to float instead of walk. Her feet do not seem to touch theground. She moves lightly and gracefully. She moves without effort.

Momma kisses me goodnight. She leaves for the party. I run to the window to

wave to her, but she is already gone.

Tonight I am very curious.

Just one touch

I sit on the edge of Momma’s bed. I place my hand on the nightstand. I pause. Ithink.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


My hand moves up and rests on the jewelry box. The box quickly flips open byitself! Jewels fly into the air. They dance around my head. I feel strange. I falldown to the floor.

I wake up in a place I have never seen before.

Questions:

11)) Where does most of this story takeplace?

A. at a party B. in a pretend place C. outside a window D. in Momma's bedroom

22)) Who is telling the story?

A. Momma B. a young girl C. Momma's friend D. a make-believe person

33)) At the beginning of the story, where

is the girl sitting?

A. in a chairB. on the bedC. on the floorD. next to the window

44)) The jewelry box looks magical.

What does this mean?

A. It looks simple. B. It looks expensive. C. It looks like it has special

powers. D. It looks like it was made a long

time ago.

55)) What does Momma tell her

daughter about the box?

A. that it is magical B. that she must never touch it C. that the jewels are expensive D. that she can touch it when she is

older

66)) Where is Momma going?

A. ____________________

_______________________

_______________________

77)) What does the jewelry box looklike?


A. □ It is brown.

B. □ It is wooden.

C. □ It is the size of a shoebox.

D. □ It has colored stones on top.

88)) Which word best describes how thegirl feels about the jewelry box?

A. angryB. curiousC. in loveD. scared

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



99)) When does the girl say Mommaseems to glow?

A. when she puts on make-up B. when she puts on a necklace C. when she puts on the rings and

bracelets D. when she puts on nice shoes

and a fancy dress

1100)) What does the girl seem to bethinking about when she sits onthe edge of the bed?

A. going to a partyB. how to open the boxC. dancing around the roomD. if she should touch the box

1111)) How old is the girl?

A. ____________________

_______________________

_______________________

1122)) What does the reader learn aboutthe box?

A. It is evil. B. It can fly. C. It is very heavy.D. It has special powers.

1133)) What does it mean if something isa big deal ?

A. It is a heavy thing. B. It is very important. C. It cannot be forgotten. D. It can make a lot of money.

1144)) What does the girl mean when shesays that Momma seems to float ?

A. that Momma is swimming B. that Momma looks like a boat C. that it is difficult for Momma to

move D. that Momma moves without

much effort

1155)) How might the end of the storymake a reader feel?


A. □ unsure of what has happenedB. □ curious about the power of

the boxC. □ sure that the girl is in danger

D. □ wondering what happensnext

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““LLaattee”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


Martin is in a hurry.

He is late to work again.

Martin's boss doesn't like it when he is late. Martin was late last week. His bosstold him not to be late again.

“You can’t be late anymore,” said Martin’s boss. "I mean it."

Martin thinks he might lose his job if he is late again.

The time is now 7:15 am. Martin needs to be to work by 7:30. It takes him 22

minutes to drive to work.“Things don’t look good,” he says to himself.

Martin runs out of the house. He jumps in his car. He puts the car in reverse. Hebacks up without looking.

BOOM!

There is a sound like someone hitting a drum. Martin’s car jerks toa stop. He has hit the car parked behind him.

“Oh no!” Martin exclaims. He is angry now.

Martin looks at his watch. It is 7:18. He needs to get to work.He looks around. There is no one on the street. There is no one nearby.

He looks in the parked car. It is empty.

Martin drives off quickly.

He gets to work 10 minutes late.

Martin’s boss is not around. “Thank goodness,” he says to himself.

He stops worrying. He sits at his desk to work.

During lunch, Martin goes out to the parking lot. He looks at his car. There is a

big dent in the back.

Then he thinks about the other car - the car he hit this morning. "I know that caris damaged too," he thinks.

He feels guilty.

“That was not right,” Martin says to himself.

He will see if the car is still outside his house when he gets off work.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Questions:

11)) Martin is in a hurry. What does thismean?

A. He is running.

B. He is angry. C. He is late. D. He is moving fast.

22)) Why is Martin in a hurry?

A. ____________________

____________________

____________________

33)) Martin's boss says, "I mean it."What does this mean?

A. He is serious.B. He is angry. C. He is emotional.

D. He is interested.

44)) What does Martin think will happenif he is late to work again?

A. He will get a pay cut.B. He will need to buy a watch.C. He will get fired from his job.

D. He will need to adjust hisschedule.

55)) What time does Martin need to be atwork?

A. ____________________

_______________________

_______________________

66)) If Martin leaves the house at 7:15,what time would he get to work?

A. 7:32 B. 7:37 C. 7:40 D. 7:52

77)) What is the loud noise?

A. Martin yelling B. police sirens sounding C. Martin driving off the road D. Martin hitting someone’s car

88)) Martin checks if there is anyonenearby. What does nearby mean?

A. in B. next to C. close to D. far (away) from

99)) Why doesn't Martin get in troublewith his boss today?

A. His boss is not around.B. He gets to work on time. C. His boss feels sorry for him.D. Martin says he is sorry for being

late.

1100)) Who does Martin talk to during thestory?


A. □ his boss

B. □ his friends

C. □ himself

D. □ the driver of the other car

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



1111)) How do Martin's feelings changeduring the story?

A. from hurried, to guilty, to angryB. from angry, to guilty, to hurriedC. from hurried, to angry, to guiltyD. from angry, to hurried, to angry

1122)) Why did Martin look around afterhe hit the car?

A. He needed help. B. He wanted a ride to work. C. He needed to check the time. D. He wanted to check if anyone

saw him.

1133)) What does it mean to feel guilty?

A. to feel bad about doingsomething

B. to feel worried about doingsomething

C. to feel unsure about doingsomething

D. to feel like you want to changesomething

1144)) What might Martin do if the car hehit is still there after work?


A. □ He might hit it again.

B. □ He might try to find theowner.

C. □ He might try to hide the dent.

D. □ He might leave a note on the

car with his name and number.

Do you think Martin is a good employee? Why or why not?

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““LLoovvee TTr r aaiinn”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


When I was a little girl, I loved for my mom to tell me stories aboutherself. No matter how tired she was, she never adumbrated them. She wouldfill the tales with the minutest details, and they were always fascinating.

Another thing she did was tell the stories with such grandiloquence! Then shewould stop and say, “Now what do you think that word means?” I would try topiece together what was happening in the story and make my best guess.

To this day, when I want to bug my friends, I use the huge words I first learnedleaning on Mom's shoulder as she recounted a snippet of her life.

My favorite story was the one about how my mom met my dad:

“I was 17-years-old, but I already knew the kind of man I would marry. Takenote:"

“He would not be too garrulous. I tell you, Rosa, it‟s important for a man to taketime to listen to what you have to say."

“And never impertinent. I‟ll never forget when I was 16; a boy from my churchnamed Joe Turner came and knocked on our door. He didn‟t look my momma inthe eye, and didn‟t say, „Hello.‟ He just leaned against the door jam and said,„Rosa here?‟"

“My momma raised her brow and said, „She is, but not for boys such asyourself.‟"

“But I digress. I‟m supposed to be telling you about the day I met your daddy,right?"

“Okay, so I was riding the Amtrak train between Providence and Philadelphiaduring my freshman year at Brown, and the door at the end of my car rattledopen."

“He was tall and swarthy. He wore a thick ivory cable knit sweater with a gray

wool scarf wrapped firmly around his neck. I couldn‟t tell what his heritage wasand that intrigued me. What was he -- Indian, Portuguese, Peruvian?”

Mom would pause here and I would shout, “Cape Verdean!”

She‟d continue.

“Well, if I had been shy, I might have just looked out the train window. But thenwhere would I be now? You wouldn‟t even be here! So I let my eyes lock with hisas he wobbled down the moving train."

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


“He smiled a slight smile, not a big one. His eyes raised just enough to let meknow he had spotted me too.”

I always loved this line and would smile at the image of my dad stumbling downthe train and then noticing my radiant mom.

“So Rosa, once we spotted each other, your dad found infinite reasons to walkpast me to go to the café car."

"I was sitting by myself along the aisle. So finally, I just slid over to the window,leaving the seat next to me empty."

“Your dad came back with two cups of hot cocoa and sat down with a smile. Andwe had the most delightful conversation!"

“I could tell right then that this was no ephemeral crush – this was the real deal. Iwas going to end up loving this man forever.”

Here comes the part I loved best about the story.

“We pull into the train station in Philadelphia, and it‟s time for me to get off. Hewas heading on to Washington where he was going to school."

“I prepared myself for some hackneyed expression as I got off the train. Youknow, „Great meeting you,‟ or „You‟re the apple of my eye.‟"

"I also worried he might try to sneak a smooch, which would have been a big turnoff. We'd just met!"

"Instead, he took my hand gently and gave it a little squeeze. He said, „If it‟s thethought that counts, consider yourself kissed.‟”

Mama said she just about died when he said that! Then she said to herself, “Thatman will be my husband.”

And so he is.

Questions:

11)) As used in this passage, which isthe best antonym for adumbrated?

A. detailed B. lengthened C. invented D. simplified E. understated

22)) As used in the passage, what is themeaning of grandiloquence?

A. technical jargon B. archaic speech C. pithy expression D. pompous language E. foreign word or phrase

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



33)) What is ironic about the title of this passage?

A. Rosa's mother does not like clichés.B. The passage has nothing to do with a song.C. It is where Rosa's mother meets her husband-to-be.D. The train only went a short distance but their love was forever.

E. Rosa's mother could not have possibly loved her father after such a shorttrain ride.

44)) Why might the author have chosen Rosa as the narrator even though it is her

mother who is telling the main story?

A. to make the story harder to followB. to make the story seem more straightforwardC. to make it clear that Rosa‟s mother has passed awayD. to make it clear that the story happened a long time ago

E. so that the reader could learn the story from Rosa's perspective

55)) As used in the passage, what is the meaning of garrulous?

A. conceitedB. loquaciousC. narrow-mindedD. obsequiousE. patronizing

66)) Which best situation describes someone who has been impertinent?

A. A man crashes into the car in front of him.B. A student gestures rudely to his teacher.

C. A child rushes out the door, forgetting to say good-bye to his mom.D. A woman refuses to let her son play video games before school.E. A dog chases all the cats in the neighborhood.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



77)) Which is the best antonym for digress?

A. stop B. stray

C. shorten D. rememberE. stay on course

88)) What may Rosa be meaning to convey to her child by telling this story?

A. advice on what to look for in a partnerB. a regret that she met her husband on a trainC. the suggestion that Rosa might find her husband on a trainD. a yearning to go back to that time and place

E. the idea that education should come before marriage

99)) Judging from the passage, what does Rosa's mother find most important in ahusband?

▼Check three that are correct.

A. □ humor

B. □ politeness

C. □ originality

D. □ respectfulness

E. □ heroism

1100)) What is implied in the following paragraph?

"Well, if I had been shy, I might have just looked out the train window. Wherewould I be now? You wouldn’t even be here! But I let my eyes lock with his ashe wobbled down the moving train."

A. that Rosa really wanted to just look out the windowB. that it is best to be outspoken in all circumstancesC. that as soon as they locked eyes they fell in loveD. that a slight change in circumstances could have greatly altered her life E. that the story took place before technology allowed trains to offered

smooth ride

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



1111)) As used in this passage, what isthe meaning of ephemeral?

A. fleeting

B. permanent C. ridiculous D. serious E. young

1122)) Which is the best antonymfor hackneyed?

A. happy

B. humorous C. original D. over-used E. turbulent

Do you like this story? What is your favorite part? What is your least favorite

part? What could you do to make it better?

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““MMuussiicc”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


There are many different kinds of music.

There is jazz music.

There is rock music.

There is rap music.

There is country music.

There is classical music.

Do you like music?

Questions:

11)) What does kinds mean in thispassage?

A. artists

B. types C. instruments

22)) Which is not a kind of music?

A. fun music B. classical music

C. rock music

33)) How many different kinds ofmusic are listed in the passage?

A. threeB. fourC. five

44)) If you like music, then you think itis ________.

A. good B. okay C. bad

What is your favorite kind of music? Why?

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““MMyy FFaammiillyy”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


Hi, my name is Eric. I want to talk about my family.

I have two sisters. Their names are Rachel and Carrie. Rachel is 18 years old.Carrie is 10 years old. They are very nice.

My mother's name is Julia. She is 40 years old. My mother is also very nice.

My father's name is Andre. He is smart. He is an engineer. He builds bridges.

I also have a dog. My dog's name is Paw. He is a big dog. He is a brown dog. Heis a big brown dog.

I love my family.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Questions:

11)) How many sisters do I have?

A. one

B. twoC. threeD. four

22)) How old is my mom?

A. twenty-five

B. thirtyC. thirty-fiveD. forty

33)) My dad is…

A. a doctor.B. a lawyer.C. an engineer.D. a construction worker.

44)) What is the name of my dog?

A. ________________

55)) What color is my dog?

A. He is white.B. He is black.C. He is brown.D. He is yellow.

66)) What is the name of my youngersister?

A. ________________

77)) What is the name of my older

sister?

A. ________________

88)) Is my dog small or big?

A. He is small.B. He is big.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““MMyy FFr r iieenndd”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


I have a friend.

My friend lives in California.

My friend is a girl.

She is seventeen years old.

Her name is Jessica Roberts.

Jessica is cool. I like her a lot.

She likes to read. She is a good reader.

She is good at math too. It is her best subject.

Jessica is smart.

I like to eat lunch with her. We eat lunch on Monday, Tuesday, and Wednesday.

Jessica is my friend.

Questions:

11)) Where does my friend live?

A. Colorado B. Texas C. California

22)) Is my friend a girl or a boy?

A. She is a girl. B. He is a boy.

33)) How old is my friend?

A. 15 years oldB. 16 years oldC. 17 years old

44)) What is my friend's first name?

A. Jenny B. Jessica C. Julia

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



55)) What is my friend's last name?

A. Rowan

B. RandalC. Roberts

66)) What is Jessica's best subject?

A. English

B. Math C. Science

77)) For how many days a week do I eatlunch with Jessica?

A. 3B. 5C. 7

Do you have a good friend? What is he or she like? What things do you like to do

together?

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““MMyy HHoouussee”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


My house is in the United States. I live in the United States.The United States is a country. I like living in the US.

My house is in North Carolina. I live in North Carolina.

North Carolina is a state. The weather in NC is nice.

It is sunny. The sky is blue.

My house is in Chapel Hill. I live in Chapel Hill.

Chapel Hill is a city. It is a city on a hill.

My house is red. My house is brick.

I live in a red brick house.

Questions:

11)) What is the United States?

A. a city B. a state C. a country

22)) What is North Carolina?


33)) What is Chapel Hill?


44)) How is the weather in Chapel Hill?

A. rainy B. sunny C. cloudy

55)) What is the house made of?

A. wood B. brick C. metal

66)) What color is the house?

A. red B. blue C. yellow

77)) What is a hill?

A. a forest B. a large river C. a small mountain

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““NNeeww SShhooeess f f oor r MMaaddddyy”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


Maddy loves to jump rope, scooter and ride her skateboard. One day, Maddygets a hole in the shoes she likes best while riding her scooter. They are pinkwith hearts and a Velcro tab. Now she needs new shoes.

Maddy's mom takes her to the shoe store Saturday morning. The store fills withpeople looking for shirts, dresses, pants and toys. Maddy's mom takes her to theshoe area.

The shoe area is crowded, and there is a long wait. Maddy does not mind.Maddy sees a pair of purple sneakers with orange laces. She sees a pair of red

sandals with dots. She sees a pair of green flip-flops. She wants the purplesneakers.

"But you do not know how to tie your laces," says Maddy's mom.

"I will learn," says Maddy.

Maddy's mother thinks. She does not want to tie Maddy's laces each morningbefore school.

"If we buy the purple sneakers, you must learn to tie them before you can wearthem to school," says Maddy's mom.

"I will! I promise!" says Maddy. She is very happy.

Maddy practices tying her laces for the rest of the day. She practices more onSunday. Finally, she learns how to tie her laces.

She gets to wear her new shoes to school on Monday.

"I did it," she says with a big smile.

Questions:

11)) Why does Maddy need new shoes?

A. Her shoes are too small.B. Her shoes are very old. C. She lost her favorite shoes. D. She got a hole in her shoes.

22)) How does Maddy get a hole in hershoes?

A. riding her skateboardB. riding her scooter C. jumping rope D. playing basketball

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



33)) Which shoes have a hole?

A. the green flip-flops B. the red sandals

C. the pink shoes with hearts D. the purple sneakers

44)) Which shoes does Maddy want tobuy?

A. the pink shoes with hearts

B. the purple sneakers C. the green flip-flops D. the red sandals with dots

55)) How does Maddy feel about the longwait at the store?

A. She is mad about it.B. She is sad about it.C. She is excited about it.

DD.. She feels okay about it.

66)) Who does Maddy see in the store?

A. a lot of peopleB. her older sisterC. her friends from schoolD. one of her neighbors

77)) When can Maddy wear her shoes toschool?

A. when she learns how to tieB. as soon as she leaves the storeC. after summer vacationD. tomorrow

88)) In paragraph 8, what does theword promise mean?

A. that Maddy wants to learn to tieB. that Maddy will learn to tieC. that Maddy cannot learn to tieDD.. that Maddy might learn to tie

99)) What does Maddy's mom NOT wantto do?

A. buy Maddy new shoes B. buy Maddy green flip-flops C. buy more than one pair of shoes D. tie Maddy's shoes in the

morning

1100)) How might Maddy feel afterlearning to tie?


A. □ happy

B. □ proud

C. □ shy

D. □ sick

1111)) What lesson did Maddy learn?

A. Practice makes perfect.B. Do not ride a scooter with pink

shoes.C. Be careful what you wish for.D. School is fun with new shoes.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““PPaauull CCooookkss”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


Paul loves to read cookbooks.

His wife gets him one on his birthday.

Paul tells her he will try to make a new recipe for three days in a row.

On Monday, Paul makes blueberry pancakes for breakfast. He gets theblueberries from the farmer's market.

On Tuesday, Paul makes beef soup for dinner. He puts in cubes of beef, carrotsand onions.

The recipe calls for cream, but Paul does not like cream. He uses water instead.

On Wednesday, Paul makes a tomato salad with cucumbers and onions.

He picks the cucumbers and tomatoes from his garden.

He likes this dish best. It was also the easiest for him to make.

Questions:

11)) What does Paul love to read?

A. __________________

22)) Who gives Paul a cookbook?

A. _________________

33)) What does Paul say he will do?

A. become a chefB. grow his own foodC. cook every recipe in a week D. try a new recipe for three days in

a row

44)) On what day does Paul makepancakes?

A. _________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



55)) What does Paul get from thefarmer's market?

A. _________________

66)) Where does Paul get cucumbersand tomatoes?

A. from his wifeB. from the storeC. from his gardenD. f rom the farmer’s market

77)) Which dish does Paul like best?

A. the blue oneB. beef soupC. tomato salad

D. blueberry pancakes

88)) Why doesn't Paul use cream?

A. He doesn’t like it.B. There was none at the store.C. There was none in the garden.

D. There was none at the farmer'smarket.

99)) What does Paul use instead ofcream?

A. _____________________

1100)) Which dish was the easiest forPaul to make?

A. _____________________

Do you like to cook? What is your favorite dish?

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““PPiiggss”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


Pigs are interesting animals.

They have four legs.

They have a small tail.

They have a round, flat nose. Their nose is called a snout.

They make funny sounds. They grunt and squeal.

They lay in the mud to keep cool.

A pig will eat almost anything!

Questions:

11)) What does a snout look like?

A. small and fatB. round and flat

C. long and thinD. big and square

22)) What might a pig do if it is hot?

A. take a shower B. drink warm water

C. move into the barnD. lay in a puddle of mud

33)) What does a pig eat?

A. cornB. meatC. carrotsD. all of the above

Do you like pigs? Why or why not?

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““RRaaiinnyy DDaayy”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


My name is Mimi.

Today is July 5th, 2010.Today is a rainy day.I am happy today.

Why am I happy?I am happy because it is raining!

Is that strange?Maybe.

But I like it when it rains. The rain makes me happy.

I like rainy days. I do not like sunny days.

I like the sound of the rain.I like the clouds. The clouds are gray. The clouds are big.I like the rain.

Questions:

11)) What is my name?

A. __________________

22)) What is the date today?

A. March 4th, 2012

B. July 5th, 2010 C. April 10th, 1990 D. November 28th, 1987

33)) Why am I happy?

A. because it is your birthdayB. because you passed the testC. because it is rainingD. because you won the game

44)) Do I like sunny days?

A. Yes. B. No.

55)) What color are the clouds?

A. redB. blueC. grayD. green

66)) What do I like about the rain?


A. □the soundB. □the smellC. □the cloudsD. □the temperature

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““RReemmaaiinnss oof f aa MMaar r r r iiaaggee”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


“Leave it.”

Kelsey could not begin to fathom what she was hearing. In fact, a partof her began to feel she was in some sort of dream, unable to emerge towakefulness.

Even the contractor appeared flabbergasted. His mouth stayed in a half-openposition, like a marionette waiting for its strings to be tugged.

“Yes. Leave it,” Robert said again. He was speaking to the notion that someonein the room had asked him to clarify his words. No one had, but Robert had

understood the silence.

What were the chances that an Indian burial ground would be found on thebucolic site where Robert and Kelsey had chosen to build their dream home?Why in the world would Robert not want to have the remains carted away,thought Kelsey. The last thing they needed were Indian poltergeists meanderingaround their home while the two of them were trying to renovate their marriage.

Kelsey, usually deferential to her husband, knew that now was the time to makeher position heard.

She tried to cajole Robert from the direction he was heading. “Sweetheart,” shewhinnied. “We don’t want to build on a site with human remains. It would beirreverent to the dead.”

Immediately, she saw contempt in Robert’s eyes; it was a subtle reminder of howhe often viewed her as superficial and self-absorbed.

“What would be irreverent,” said Robert, his voice dripping with condescension,“would be to desecrate these Native graves and move them from their finalresting place. Remember the culture.”

No, Kelsey did not “remember the culture.” She could care less about the culture.However, Robert, the history professor, was obviously enthralled by thecontractor’s findings. He had an innate way of understanding other cultures andother people that amazed Kelsey. He did not have that gift with her.

But something inside Kelsey said this was too much. She believedwholeheartedly in ghosts and could not imagine a life of them haunting her,rattling her cupboards, and shaking her floorboards.

Kelsey had an unnerving sensation that big problems were ahead.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Questions:

11)) Why can't Kelsey fathom what herhusband says at the beginning ofthe passage?

A. She could not hear what Robert

said.B. She could not believe what hesaid.

C. She had not yet seen theremains.

D. She could not think of a retort tohis comment.

22)) Which is the best synonymfor flabbergasted?

A. dumbfounded B. intuitive

C. querulous D. tactful

33)) What is the term given to thecomparison of the contractor to a

marionette?

A. an allusion, meaning a figure ofspeech making casual referenceto a literary figure

B. an analogy, meaning anextended comparison showingthe similarities between twothings

C. a denotation, meaning the literaldefinition of a word

D. a hyperbole, meaning a grossexaggeration

44)) "He was speaking to the not ion thatsomeone in the room had asked

him to clarify his words."

▼Choose the best way to rewrite the above

sentence.

A. He was speaking as if he hadasked himself to clarify hiswords.

B. He was speaking as if thecontractor or Kelsey had askedhim to clarify his words.

C. He was speaking as if he heard

a question but was not sure whoasked it.

D. He was speaking as if a ghost inthe room had asked him toclarify his words.

55)) Why is the title of this passageironic?

A. Nothing remains of the

marriage.B. It is not clear Robert and Kelsey

are married.C. Remains have been found on

the property.D. Kelsey and Robert are having

trouble with their marriage.

66)) What can be said about the houseRobert and Kelsey are planning tobuild?


A. □ It will be haunted.

B. □ It will be in the city.

C. □ Kelsey considers it theirdream house.

D. □ It will be in the country.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



77)) If Kelsey had chosen tobe deferential to her husband,what would she have most likelysaid?

A. "Good idea."B. "Don't be silly."C. "I'll leave you."D. "I love you."

88)) "She tried to cajole Robert from thedirection he was heading."

▼Choose the best way to rewrite the above

sentence.

A. She tried to compromise withRobert.

B. She tried to force Robert fromthe direction he was heading.

C. She tried to gently prod Robertfrom the direction he washeading.

D. She tried to give Robert veiledthreats about the direction he

was heading.

99)) Which is the best antonymfor desecrate ?

A. honorB. excavateC. defileD. criticize

1100)) What does the reader learn aboutKelsey and Robert's marriage?

A. It seems busy.B. It seems blissful.C. It seems strained.D. It seems good-natured.

1111)) What about Robert seems to keephim from wanting to move thegravesite?

A. He is controlling.B. He fears the Indians.C. He cares about history.D. He doesn't want to build a

house.

Do you think Robert and Kelsey should build on the burial ground? Explain.

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““RRuunnnniinngg”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


Dieter loves to run.

He runs in the morning. He runs in the afternoon. He runs in theevening. He runs at night.

Dieter loves to run, but it hurts to run.When Dieter runs, it hurts.His legs hurt. His arms hurt. His back hurts. His head hurts. WhenDieter runs, his whole body hurts.

Then, Dieter starts thinking. He starts dreamingHe dreams about his job. He dreams about his home.He dreams about his family. He dreams abouthis friends. He dreams about the world.

At first, running hurts. No one likes it when it hurts.When it hurts, Dieter dreams about things that do not hurt.This is why Dieter loves running. Running gives him the best dreams.Sometimes, Dieter forgets that he is running. Sometimes, he runs all morning.Sometimes, he runs all afternoon. Sometimes, he runs all night.

Dieter runs and dreams.

Questions:

1) What does Dieter love to do?

A. __________________

2) When Dieter runs, he hur ts . Whatdoes this mean?

A. He feels good.B. He feels bad.

3) What does Dieter do while he isrunning?

A. He dreams.B. He sleeps.

C. He eatsD. He drinks.

4) Why does Dieter love running?

A. because it hurtsB. because he is healthyC. because it gives him the best

dreamsD. because it gives him more

energy

5) What is one thing that Dieterdreams about?

A. ____________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““SSccoor r ppiioonn”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


Soon after Navi got engaged to Roberto, she went to meet his familyin Mexico.

She had heard many a story of Roberto’s birth city of Guanajuato, and they hadall captivated her. At one time, this colonial city was the source of two-thirds ofthe world’s silver.

“Our family goes to a beautiful church in Guanajuato,” Roberto had told her whilethey courted in the United States. “It is said that silver dust was mixed into the

cement building blocks and that is why the church sparkles.”

Navi had been enthralled. Roberto always told such wonderful stories. Shecould not wait to see the city and meet all of Roberto’s family. Navi was an artistand knew that the trip would inspire her to create.

While Roberto had imparted Navi with all the wonders of his beautiful city, it hadnot occurred to him to mention any dangers. They were young. They were inlove. They lived only in the moment.

Navi was speechless when she saw the Oratorio de San Felipe. “It really does

sparkle!” she exclaimed.

Navi kissed Roberto on the cheek. “I’ll meet you outside,” she said, leaving thechurch.

She pulled her sketchpad and pencils from her bag and went to sit against one ofthe glorious palm trees outside the church. She began sketchingthe colossal cupola which extended three stories above the nave.

Suddenly, a sharp pain took hold of her left shoulder. It felt like an electricalshock. The pain began to pervade the rest of her body.

She had been stung by a pernicious scorpion!

The last thing Navi remembered was Roberto kneeling by her side. She woke upa week later with him holding her hand and telling her a story. “In Mexico,scorpions are ubiquitous. There are more scorpion deaths here than in anyother place in the world. And they love palm trees,” he said, rubbing her handwith tears of relief in his eyes. “I should have mentioned that before.”

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Questions:

11)) Which is the best antonymfor captivated?

A. dishonored B. enthralled C. repelled D. saddened

22)) Which of the following sentencesmost clearly foreshadows that

something bad will happen?

A. They lived only in the moment. B. It had not occurred to him to

mention any dangers. C. Suddenly, a sharp pain took

hold of her left shoulder. D. “I’ll meet you outside,” she said,

leaving the church.

33)) According to the passage, whichconditions may result from ascorpion sting?


A. □ paralysis

B. □ nausea

C. □ pain

D. □ unconsciousness

44)) "They were young. They were inlove. They lived only in themoment."

▼Choose the best way to combine the abovesentences.

A. They were young and in loveand they lived only in themoment.

B. They were young and in love;they lived only in the moment.

C. They were young and in love;therefore, they lived only in themoment.

D. They were young and in love;conversely, they lived only in themoment.

55)) Which is the best antonymfor colossal?

A. banal B. microscopic C. temporal D. uninspiring

66)) What is the best synonymfor pervade?

A. numb B. paralyze C. permeate D. sicken

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



77)) How does Roberto seem to feel

about not having told Navi aboutscorpions?

A. aloofB. perplexedC. remorsefulD. validated

88)) What is the best definition

of pernicious?

A. deadlyB. evilC. sneakyD. territorial

99)) What type of narrator is telling this

story?

A. first person, characterized as aperson in the story.

B. second person, characterized asspeaking directly to the reader.

C. third person omniscient,characterized as knowing whatall the characters are thinking.

D. third person focalized,characterized by knowing only

what one character may bethinking

1100)) Which is the best antonym

for ubiquitous?

A. scarceB. benevolentC. harmlessD. adulterated

Do you think Navi should be upset at Roberto? Explain.

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““SSeeeeiinngg CClleeaar r llyy”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


The announcement that Donna had reached middle age camestealthily and without warning.

Donna, at 42-years-old, was in perfect health. She was fit, trim and ate only thehealthiest of foods, eschewing soda and candy. She was still asked for heridentification when buying wine at the grocery store. She ran several miles everyday, and in local road races, she was known for beating people half her age.

“Forty is the new twenty!” her friends would say of Donna’s seeming

agelessness.

Donna heard the quip so often that a part of her believed that this aging thingwas surely for other people.

That all changed during what should have been a fairly innocuous event: a tripto the Department of Motor Vehicles to renew her driver’s license.

“Name?” the clerk asked without looking up. Donna replied.

“Address?” Donna gave it.

“Look through there, please,” the clerk gestured toward an eye testing machineperched at the edge of the desk. “Read the first four lines,” she sighed.

Donna pushed her head against the contraption.

“Go ahead.”

Donna was perplexed. Everything was fuzzy. “I think the glass is dirty,” Donnasaid, searching the desk for a tissue to wipe off the lens.

“It’s not dirty,” the clerk said, her voice dripping with condescension.

“There must be some problem,” Donna said, pressing her head against themachine once more.

“Ma’am, do you wear glasses?”

“No, no, I don’t,” Donna responded, a little embarrassed now, as other people inthe room began turning to see what was going on.

The clerk glanced down at Donna’s old license and back up at her. “Welcome tomiddle age, sweetheart. Come back when you’ve had an eye exam and gottenglasses.”

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Questions:

11)) What proverb fits this story best?

A. Time marches on.

B. Time heals all wounds. C. A stitch in time saves nine. D. There is no time like the present.

22)) Which is the best antonymfor stealthily?

A. honestly B. obviously C. slowly D. sneakily

33)) If Donna is eschewing candy andsoda, what is she doing?

A. overindulgingB. avoiding them

C. eating them in moderationD. eating only the all-natural

versions

44)) Using the passage as a guide,which best describes the meaningof "Forty is the new twenty"?

A. If you are in good health and

shape, being 40 can feel like 20. B. When people turn 40, they are

likely to say they are in their 20s. C. If you are 20, and not in great

shape, you can feel like you are40.

D. If you stay away from junk food,you can look 40 even when youare 20.

55)) Which is the best antonymfor innocuous?

A. dangerous B. difficult C. juvenile D. mature

66)) What is the difference between thefirst four paragraphs of this passageand the rest?

A. The first highlights Donna'spride, the last shows her anger.

B. The first highlights the good lifeDonna has had, the last showsher regret.

C. The first highlights Donna'syouth, the last shows that she

has aged.D. The first highlights Donna's

fitness, the last shows she is outof shape.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



77)) Which best describes the clerk'sattitude?

A. hostile

B. incoherent C. patronizing D. domineering

88)) Which statementssuggest condescension?


A. □ It is not safe to go shoppingat night.

B. □ Take your dirty feet off mydesigner sofa.

C. □ If you had studied, you wouldhave done better on the test.

D. □ If you had my fashion sense,you wouldn't have chosen thatoutfit to wear.

99)) Which best describes the tone of thispassage?

A. angryB. darkC. lightheartedD. passionate

1100)) What is ironic about the clerkcalling Donna "Ma'am"?

A. It is not proper English. B. The clerk does not know

Donna's name. C. It is a term often reserved for

older people. D. It is unclear to whom the clerk is

speaking.

Do you feel younger than you actually are? Do you feel older? Explain.

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““SSeeeeiinngg SSttaar r ss”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


Yana is my mother.

Tony is my father.

My name is Sasha.

We live in a red house.

We have a blue car.

We sit in the yard at night.

We look at the stars.

Father tells me the stars make him happy.

Mother tells me the stars make her want to sing.

I like to guess how many stars are in the sky.

We hear a baby cry next door. My mother sings.

The baby stops crying. We think he heard my mother’s pretty song.

We all smile.

Questions:

11)) Who is Yana?

A. Sasha's father B. Sasha’s mother C. Tony's father D. Tony’s mother

22)) What color is Sasha's house?

A. __________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



33)) Who is telling the story?

A. FatherB. MotherC. Sasha D. The baby

44)) When do they sit in the yard?

A. _________________

55)) How do the stars make Sasha'sfather feel?

A. Funny.B. Happy.C. Like counting.D. Like singing.

66)) What happens when Mother sings?

A. A friend comes by.B. Father gets sleepy.C. Sasha counts stars.D. The baby stops crying.

77)) What does Sasha like to do whenshe sees the stars?

A. She likes to sit in the car.B. She likes to hold the baby.C. She likes to sing with her

mother.D. She likes to guess how many

there are.

88)) What do Mother, Father and Sashado at the end of the story?

A. They cry.B. They laugh.C. They smile. D. They talk.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““SSeeeeiinngg TThhr r oouugghh”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


Jeffrey brushed quickly past an elderly woman waiting on the platform ahead ofhim to get onto the subway. He wanted to be sure to get a seat to readhis Financial Times. As the train screeched out of the station, he lifted his headfrom business news and stared at the man directly across from him.

A fierce wave – a tsunami – of antipathy came over him. Jeffrey knew this man,knew him all too well.

Their eyes locked.

As the train reached full speed, the ruckus of speeding wheels against thewinding rails and a wildly gyrating subway car filled Jeffrey’s ears. To this freneticbeat, Jeffrey effortlessly listed in his head all the reasons this man, whose eyeshe stared coldly into, was an anathema to him.

He had climbed the upper echelons of his Wall Street firm usingan imper ious manner with his subordinates, always making sure everyone knewhe was the boss.

Despite his impoverished upbringing, he had become ostentat ious . Flush withcash from the lucrative deals he had made on Wall Street, he had purchased a

yacht and a home in Versailles. He used neither. But, oh, how he liked to say hehad them. Meanwhile, Jeffrey knew, this man’s parents were on the verge ofbeing evicted from their run-down tenement apartment in the South Bronx.

What bothered Jeffrey most about this man was that he never even attempted tomake amends for his evil ways.

Could this man change? Jeffrey did not know. He could try though.

The train screeched to Jeffrey’s stop at Battery Park. He gave the man one lasthard look. “See you around,” he mumbled to himself. And he knew would,

because Jeffrey had been glaring at his own reflection in the subway window.

It would take years of hard work and therapy, but Jeffrey would one day noticethis man again on the train and marvel at what a kinder person he had become.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Questions:

11)) Which best describes Jeffrey's attitude in this passage?

A. feralB. florid C. hapless

D. impetuousE. self-loathing

22)) A fierce wave – a tsunami – of antipathy came over him.Given the analogy in this sentence, which word would work best insteadof came?

A. angledB. drizzled C. rained

D. swept E. trampled

33)) Which is the best antonymfor antipathy?

A. ambivalenceB. desperationC. ardorD. infatuation

E. plethora

44)) What statement makes the mostsense from what is said in thispassage?

A. Jeffrey has few friends.B. Jeffrey knows himself well.C. Jeffrey has had a difficult life.

D. Jeffrey is incapable of change.E. Jeffrey rides the subwayfrequently.

55)) "As the train reached full speed, the cacophony of speeding wheels againstthe winding rails and a wildly gyrating train filled Jeffrey’s ears."

Which describes a literary technique used in this sentence?

▼Check two that are correct.

A.□

alliteration, characterized by the repetition of an initial letter or soundB. □ analogy, an extended comparison showing the similarities between two

things

C. □ imagery, characterized by appealing to any sense or combination ofsenses

D. □ irony, characterized by a contrast or incongruity between what is statedand what is meant

E. □ personification, characterized by something being described as if itwere human

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



66)) What is the main conflict in thispassage?

A. man verses manB. man verses himselfC. man verses societyD. man verses machineE. man verses nature

77)) Which is the best definitionfor anathema?

A. a person or thing that is detestedB. a person or thing that is

misunderstoodC. a person or thing that needs

spiritual guidanceD. a person or thing that

demonstrates evil waysE. a person or thing that has mental

problems

88)) What does it mean to havean imperious manner withunderlings?

A. to ignore themB. to be stoic around themC. to openly humiliate themD. to not be affected by themE. to be domineering toward them

99)) Which is the best antonymfor ostentatious?

A. assiduous B. decadent C. modest D. miserlyE. pretentious

1100)) What is made clear by the end of passage?


A. □ that Jeffrey is wealthy

B. □ that the man Jeffrey hates is himself

C. □ that Jeffrey has been staring at a co-worker

D. □ that Jeffrey will eventually become a better person

E. □ that the old woman in the beginning of the passage is actually Jeffrey'smother

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““TTaalliiaa’’ss SSppeecciiaall DDaayy”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


Talia is going out to eat tonight.

It is a special day. She wants to look very nice for her night out.

First, she gets her hair cut at a salon. A salon is a place where people go to gettheir hair and nails done.

Then, she gets her finger nails painted pink. A woman who works at the salonpaints Talia’s nails.

Talia is not happy with the color. She asks the woman to change the color topurple.

She likes the purple very much.

It is almost time to go out. Talia goes home and looks in her closet.

She tries on a pair of light blue pants with a white shirt.

She tries on a purple dress with a black belt.

She tries on a brown skirt with a green top.

She wears the purple dress.

Many of her friends and family are at the restaurant when she gets there.

She hugs her mother and father.

She gives her grandfather a kiss.

Talia’s sister gives her a big smile.

Her best friend, Asra, gives her a present.

Talia is 25-years-old today.

“Happy Birthday, Talia,” they say. “You look great!”

“I feel great because all of you are here,” says Talia.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Questions:

11)) What is Talia doing for her specialday?

A. She is having a party. B. She is going to her friend'shouse.

C. She is making dinner.D. She is going to a restaurant.

22)) Why does Talia want to look nice?

A. It is her birthday.

B. She is going on a trip.C. She is going to church.D. She is going to school.

33)) What does Talia do first?

A. She picks out a dress.B. She gets her nails painted.

C. She gets her hair cut. D. She goes out to eat.

44)) Why does Talia change the color ofher nails?

A. It does not match her dress.

B. She is not happy with pink. C. Her friends tell her to change thecolor.

D. She is not happy with purple.

55)) What does Talia wear out?

A. light blue pants B. a brown skirt C. a purple dress

D. a green top

66)) What does Talia do when she seesher parents?

A. She smiles.B. She says hello. C. She gives them a hug.

D. She gives them a kiss.

77)) Who smiles at Talia?

A. __________________

88)) How old is Talia?

A. ___________________

99)) What is a salon ?

A. a restaurant

B. a place where people talk aboutbusiness

C. a gift shop D. a place to get hair and nails

done

1100)) Why does Talia feel great?

A. because she looks great

B. because her friends and familyare there

C. because her hair is cut D. because her nails are purple

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““TTaassttee”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


People taste different things on different parts of the tongue.

If something is sweet, like candy, we taste it on the tip of our tongue.

If something is salty, like potato chips, we taste it just behind the tip.

If something is sour, like a lemon, we taste it on the sides of our tongue.

We taste bitter things, like dark chocolate, at the back of our tongue.

Questions:

11)) What is the main point of thispassage?

A. Our tongues have manydifferent sides.

B. We taste sour things on thesides of our tongue.

C. We taste different things ondifferent parts of our tongue.

22)) According to the passage, whichpart of the tongue is likely totaste ice cream?

A. the tip B. the back C. the sides

33)) According to the passage, whichfood is tasted by the sides of thetongue?

A. candy

B. a lemon

C. potato chips

44)) Which is the best antonymfor bitter ?

A. salty B. sour C. sweet

What is your favorite food? Why?

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““TTaattttoooo”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


Justin’s mom had set down the house rules with aplomb. Only themost obtuse person would have failed to understand: no tattoos, nobody piercings and no co-ed sleepovers while living in the house of ElaineTucker Brown.

Still, the day Justin turned 18, he lied to his mother about where he was goingand headed straight to the tattoo parlor, as if impervious to his mother’s wrath.He got a light blue heart the size of an orange permanently etched onhis arm. Above this work of art was the word, “Blessed.”

No, Justin was not stupid, but he was obstinate.

Elaine saw this as an act of sheer defiance. She was incensed, her angerexacerbated by the fact that Justin had breezed into the house, found her inthe kitchen, taken off his shirt with a smile and said, “Got it!”

“No, Justin. Let me tell you what you’ve got,” Elaine said angrily. “You’ve got fiveminutes to go upstairs and pack a bag. I’m taking you to Pop-Pops.”

The ride to Pop-Pop’s house was chilly, to say the least. Elaine berated Justin for

everything she could think of, which wasn’t much because he was a straight Asenior with a full academic scholarship to his top college pick. He had a kindheart and started a foundation in the ninth grade, which donated used sportingequipment to underprivileged kids in South Africa.

Elaine pulled up to her father’s door and ordered Justin out. Not 10 minutes later,her cell phone rang.

“Elaine, have you lost it? You are kicking a boy as good as him out the house fora tattoo – that says ‘Blessed,’ no less?” her father asked, incredulous. “You willmiss him so much. Don’t cut off your nose to spite your face, Elaine. Come pick

this young man up.”

Elaine, having grown up obeying most of her parents’ demands, turned her cararound and went back to pick up her son. Justin was surprisingly contrite. “Sorryfor being so disrespectful, Mom,” he said earnestly. “I will try to follow house rulesfrom now on.”

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Questions:

11)) What other title would best fit thispassage?

A. “House Rules” B. “Visiting Pop-Pop” C. "Straight A's" D. “Body Piercings”

22)) What details does the authorinclude which may make the readersympathetic to Justin?


A. □ He is described as obstinate.

B. □ He is portrayed as kind-hearted.

C. □ He is described as a straight A student.

D. □ He is described as receivinga full scholarship to college.

33)) Which proverb does Elaine learn inthis passage?

A. Don’t make much ado aboutnothing.

B. Familiarity breeds contempt. C. No arguments will give courage

to the coward.D. If words suffice not, blows must

follow.

44)) Which proverb does Justin seem tolearn by the end of this passage?

A. Look before you leap. B. Pleasure bought with pain,

hurts. C. Youth’s first duty is reverence to

parents. D. If men had all they wished, they

would often be ruined.

55)) Which is the best antonymfor obtuse ?

A. foolhardyB. intelligentC. passionateD. stubborn

66)) What was Justin's attitude when heshowed his mother the tattoo?

A. willfully defiant B. cautiously jubilant C. convincingly contrite D. noticeably melodramatic

77)) Which is the best antonymfor impervious ?

A. elated B. impenetrable C. invigorated D. vulnerable

88)) Which is the best antonymfor exacerbate?

A. defendB. relegateC. mitigateD. understate

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



99)) "You are kicking a boy as good ashim out the house for a tattoo – thatsays ‘Blessed,’ no less?” "

▼ The above sentence has a grammaticalerror. What is it, and how should it be fixed?

A. good should be wellB. him should be heC. 'Blessed' should be "Blessed"D. less should be lest

1100)) Using the passage as a guide,which is the best interpretation ofthe idiom, cut off your nose to

spite your face ?

A. calling something bad that is notB. trying to teach something too

difficultC. loving a person less for what he

has doneD. pursuing revenge and hurting

yourself in the process

1111)) "Justin was surprisingly contr i te ."


A. Justin was surprisingly relaxed.B. Justin was surprisingly

remorseful.C. Justin had surprisingly lost his

bad attitude.D. Justin had surprisingly become

somber.

Have you ever done anything rebellious? Explain.

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



““TThhee 2200”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


It is Levi’s birthday. He has a party at home with his family.Everyone sings, “Happy Birthday!”

Levi has nine candles on his cake. He blows them out. He opens his presents.Levi’s mother and father give him a bicycle. Levi’s little sister gives him a game. Levi’s uncle gives him a baseball jersey. Levi’s grandma and grandpa give him 20 dollars!

"Thank you!" he yells to everyone.

Levi is excited. He likes all his presents.He likes the 20 dollars best.It means he can go to the store. He can buy anything he wants!

“Can we go to the store now, Mom?” asks Levi. Mom frowns. “Levi, your guests are still here. I will take you to the storetomorrow.”

That night, Levi dreams of all the things he might buy with his 20 dollars.

Maybe I will buy a video game!

Maybe I will buy a guitar!Maybe I will buy a camera!Maybe I will buy a tool kit!

In the morning, Mom takes Levi and his little sister to the store.

“Will you buy me something, too?” asks Levi’s little sister. “Maybe,” Levi says. He runs to look around the store.

Ugh!The guitar costs more than 20 dollars.The video game costs more than 20 dollars.

The camera costs more than 20 dollars.The tool kit costs 12 dollars.Levi buys the tool kit.

He buys his little sister a key chain.He buys his mom a pack of gum.

“You are a sweet boy,” Levi’s mom tells him.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Questions:

11)) Who is at Levi's party?


A. □ his friends

B. □ his parents

C. □ his teachers

D. □ his uncle

22)) How old is Levi?

A. ____________________

____________________

____________________

33)) What does Levi's sister give him?

A. a baseball jersey

B. a bike C. a game D. money

44)) How does Levi feel about hispresents?


A. □ He likes all of them.

B. □ He likes the bike best.

C. □ He likes the money best.

D. □ He likes the game least.

55)) What is one of the things Levidreams of buying?

A. a bike B. a camera C. a key chain D. a baseball jersey

66)) Why does Levi's mom frown at him?

A. Levi is mean to his sister.

B. Levi asks for more money. C. Levi does not thank everyone for

his gifts. D. Levi wants to go to the store

during the party.

77)) When does Levi go to the store?

A. ____________________

____________________

____________________

88)) What doesn't Levi know?

A. that the store is closedB. that his baseball jersey is too big

C. that most things he wants costmore than 20 dollarsD. that his sister has more money

than he does

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



99)) Who goes with Levi to the store?


A. □ his grandma

B. □ his mom

C. □ his sister

D. □ his uncle

1100)) What does Levi buy for himself?

A. ____________________

____________________

____________________

1111)) How much money does Levi haveleft after buying the tool kit?

A. $20 plus $12

B. $20 minus $12C. $20 times $12DD.. $20 divided by $12

1122)) Why does Levi's mom call him asweet boy?

A. because it is his birthday

B. because he eats a lot of candyon his birthday

C. because he waits until the nextday to go to the store

D. because he buys something forhis mom and little sister

If you had twenty dollars, what would you buy with it? Why?

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““TThhee BBllooww DDr r yyeer r ”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


A blow dryer is a common household appliance.

Have you ever wondered how a blow dryer works?

A small fan inside the dryer spins when you turn it on.

The fan sucks air into the dryer from the back.

The air warms up as it passes across heated coils inside the blow-dryer.

The warm air blows out the front of the dryer and dries your hair.

This is much faster than using a towel to dry your hair.

Questions:

11)) What is this passage mainlyabout?

A. how blow dryers work

B. why blow dryers are safe

C. why you should not towel dryyour hair

22)) What does spin mean?

A. to move up and down B. to make a loud noise

C. to turn around quickly

33)) According to the passage, whatdoes the fan on a blow dryer do?

A. heats the coils

B. sucks air into the dryer C. keeps the dryer cool

44)) What does suck mean?

A. to push B. to blow out C. to draw in

55)) What does this passage suggestabout blow dryers?

A. They are safe. B. They save time. C. They cost a lot of money.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““TThhee BBr r aaiinn”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


The brain is a part of your body.

It is inside your head.

You use your brain to think.

The brain makes your fingers, eyes,ears, arms and legs work.

You need your brain!

Questions:

11)) Where is your brain?

A. in your legs B. in your head C. in your toes

22)) How do you think?

A. with your eyes B. with your brain C. with your toes

33)) The brain makes your ______ and ______ work.


A. □ arms

B. □ trees

C. □ legs

D. □ flowers

E.□

machines

Is the brain important? Why?

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““TThhee BBr r eennnneer r ss”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


The Brenner family has a mom, a dad, three boys, two dogs, a hamster and fourfrogs.

They are very happy.

Their house is very small.

Mom and Dad share one bedroom.

The three boys share one bedroom. Their names are Billy, Bobby and Brad.

All the pets sleep in the living room.

Mr. and Mrs. Brenner came home today from the doctor with news. It is very bignews .

“There are going to be two more of us,” Mrs. Brenner says with a smile.“I am pregnant.”

Billy, Bobby and Brad cheer. “We will have a basketball team,” Billy says.

“And do you know what Dad and I have decided we need?” asks Mrs. Brenner?

“A coach?” asks Bobby.

“No,” Mr. Brenner says with a laugh, “ A bigger house.”

Over the next week, the Brenner family starts looking for a new house.

On Monday, they see a brick house with a big front porch. It has three bedrooms.Mr. Brenner likes this one.

On Thursday, they see a wooden house with a big backyard. It has fourbedrooms. Mrs. Brenner thinks this house is great.

On Saturday, they see a house with four bedrooms and a pool. The boys like thishouse a lot. They dream of having their friends over for a swim.

“But it’s smaller than the house we live in now!” Mrs. Brenner says.

All of the houses cost a lot of money.

“I think we need to save more money before we buy a bigger house,” says Mr.Brenner. Mrs. Brenner agrees.

Soon, two new babies arrive in their very small house. Their names are Beth andBrooke.

The two baby girls sleep in a crib by their parent’s bed.

Mr. Brenner buys a basketball hoop and puts it in the driveway.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Questions:

11)) What is the Brenner house like?


A. □ crowded

B. □ dirty

C. □ small

D. □ empty

22)) Who shares a bedroom?

A. Dad and BobbyB. everyone

C. Mom, Dad and BradD. Billy, Bobby, and Brad

33)) What pets do the Brenners have?


A. □ three dogs

B. □ a hamster C. □ four frogs

D. □ a cat

44)) How many dogs do the Brennershave?

A. ____________________

____________________

____________________

55)) What can be said about all the kids'names?

A. They are all boy names.B. They all start with the letter "B."

C. They are all long.D. They all end in "Y."

66)) What is the big news ?

A. Mrs. Brenner is pregnant withtwins.

B. The Brenners are moving to a

new house.C. The Brenners are starting a

basketball team.D. The Brenners are getting some

new pets.

77)) Why does Bobby say the Brennersneed a coach?

A. because Mr. Brenner is too busy

to coachB. because they need help buying

a houseC. because they will soon have

enough kids for a basketballteam

D. because Mrs. Brenner will notbe able to coach while she ispregnant

88)) Which house does Mr. Brennerlike?

A. the one with a pool

B. the one with a big backyardC. the one with a big front porchD. the one with four bedrooms

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““TThhee BBuuss DDr r iivveer r ”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


Dana Miller is a bus driver.

She drives a bus in the city of Philadelphia.

She works the night shift. That means she starts work at 10:00 at night and getsoff at 6:00 in the morning.

Dana has been driving a bus for 15 years. She started when she was 23-years-old.

She loves her job most of the time. She gets to see the beautiful city from herseat.

She gets to meet all kinds of people.

There is the guitar player. He lugs his heavy guitar on the bus every Friday night.He plays at a night spot downtown.

People call him Get Low. That is because he likes to play the guitar on his knees.

If the bus is not too crowded, Get Low plays in the back of the bus. The bus isseldom crowded at night.

There is the woman who works at the pretzel factory. Each day the “PretzelLady” brings Dana a bag of fresh, soft pretzels. They fill the bus with a wonderfulsmell!

Sometimes Dana’s job is hard. It is hard when Dana sees people down on theirluck.

One time, a young woman left her sleeping baby on the bus. There was a noteon the baby's blanket asking for help. Dana had to call the police.

Another time, a teenage boy stole money from Dana on the bus. He had a fake

gun. Dana thought it was real. She was very scared.

Occasionally, driving the bus can be scary. But most of the time, driving the busis great. Dana does not want to work anywhere else.

“How was your night?” Dana’s husband likes to ask when she gets home.

“Good music, good food and a great view of the city,” she says.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Questions:

11)) Where does Dana drive the bus?

A. around Philadelphia B. to the police station

C. to pick up guitar players D. to pick up school children

22)) What shift does Dana work?

A. ____________________

_______________________

_______________________

33)) How old is Dana?

A. 15B. 23 C. 38 D. 39

44)) How long is Dana's shift?

A. 6 hours B. 8 hours C. 10 hours D. 12 hours

55)) What is one reason Dana loves her job?

A. She finds sleeping babies. B. She gets to call the police. C. She gets to sleep during the

day. D. She gets to meet all kinds of

people.

66)) Why is the guitar player called GetLow?

A. He has a low voice. B. He likes to play sitting down. C. He likes to play on his knees. D. It is the name of his favorite

song.

77)) What does the word lug mean?

A. to throw B. to push easily C. to carry on one's head D. to move something that is hard

to move around

88)) What night does the guitar playerride the bus?

A. ____________________

_______________________

_______________________

99)) How often does Get Low play guitaron the bus?


A. □ every Friday night

B. □ when the bus is crowded

C. □ most Friday nights

D. □ when the bus is not crowded

11

00

))

Who gives Dana pretzels?

A. the guitar player B. the young mom C. the teenager D. the woman who works at the

factory

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Questions:

1111)) Why might the young woman haveleft her baby?

A. He was cold.

B. He was sleeping.C. She forgot the baby.D. She felt she could not take care

of him.

1122)) Who steals money?

A. ____________________

_______________________

_______________________

1133)) Why does Dana seem to thinkpeople do bad things?


A. □ They are bad people.

B. □ They want to be bad.

C. □ They are down on their luck.

D. □ Someone told them to bebad.

1144)) What is the best synonymfor occasionally ?

A. oftenB. sometimes

C. neverD. almost always

1155)) What great view of the city doesDana have?

A. from a tall building

B. from a mountain topC. from the sidewalkD. from her bus seat

Do you think Dana has a good job? Explain.

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““TThhee BBuutttteer r f f llyy”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


The butterfly is a beautiful insect.

It has four thin wings.

The wings can have many different colors on them.

As a butterfly gets older, the colors on its wings fade.

Butterflies live all over the world.

Most butterflies live where it is very warm and not too dry.

Questions:

11)) How many wings does a butterflyhave?

A. 2 B. 4

C. 6

22)) According to the passage, whathappens to a butterfly as it getsolder?

A. Its wings fall off.

B. It becomes a caterpillar. C. The colors on its wings fade.

33)) What does fade mean?

A. to lose colorB. to get darkerC. to change order

44)) Where do most butterflies live?

A. in hot placesB. in cool, dry placesC. in warm places that are not too

dry

55)) What is a butterfly?

A. an animalB. an insect C. a mammal

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““TThhee DDr r iivvee”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


Gustavo works far away from his home.

He drives a car to work. It takes him 3 hours to get there.

Gustavo drives.

While he drives, he thinks about many things.

He thinks about his little girl. She likes to ride horses.

He thinks about his little boy. He plays fireman all the time.

He thinks about his wife. She milks the cows on the farm.

Gustavo thinks of things he has to do when he gets home.

He needs to cut the grass.

He needs to water the flowers.

He wants to read a story to his little girl.

He wants to play a game with his little boy.

He wants to sit with his wife. He wants to tell her about his day.

Questions:

11)) How does Gustavo get to work?

A. By busB. By carC. By horseD. By train

22)) What does Gustavo do when hedrives?

A. He sings.B. He talks.C. He thinks.D. He works.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



33)) What does Gustavo think about?


A.□

His car.B. □ His little boy.

C. □ His wife.D. □ His work.

44)) How long does it take Gustavo toget to work?

A. ___________________

55)) What does his little girl like to do?

A. Milk cows.B. Play fireman.C. Ride horses.D. Water flowers.

66)) What does his little boy like to play?

A. ___________________

77)) What does Gustavo need to dowhen he gets home?


A. □ Read a story.B. □ Milk the cows.C. □ Cut the grass.D. □ Water the flowers.

88)) What does Gustavo want to dowhen he gets home?


A. □ Sit with his wife.B. □ Water the flowers.C. □ Read to his little girl. D. □ Play a game with his little boy

99)) Why may Gustavo need to cut thegrass?

A. It is too green.B. It is too brown.C. It is too long.D. It is too short.

1100)) Why may Gustavo need to waterthe flowers?

A. So they will go.B. So they will give.C. So they will grow.D. So they will guess.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““TThhee MMiinnii PPr r oobblleemm”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


Lily’s anger could not have been more palpable.

She awakened Christmas morning and, along with her brother, ran down to seethe gifts under the tree.

In the living room sat a magnificent mini bike. It was red with a pearly white gastank and side panels. For a brief moment, Lily was filled with what seemedlike insurmountable excitement. Then, her eyes caught hold of a baby dollsitting on the couch with a huge bow.

She knew. She knew that the mini bike belonged to her brother and that she hadbeen relegated to that doll. It was par for the course.

Tommy always got cool things: skateboards, gliders, science kits. The mini bikewas just the latest cool thing.

Lily always got the boring gifts: a doll with a gown, a doll with a tutu, a doll with apuppy. This doll seemed unusually blah. The doll wore a petticoat. The doll hadshort, straight black hair.

Tommy had seen that mini-bike in the front window of Moore’s Bike Shop, buthadn’t Lily too? Hadn’t she asked for it with as much fervor as her twin brother?

Tommy’s eyes grew wide at the sight of the bike he knew was his – no doll forhim. He ran into his parent’s room and jumped excitedly on the bed.

“Thank you, Mama! Thank you, Papa,” he yelled.

Lily seethed in the other room. It took a while for anyone to even realize she wasmissing.

“What’s wrong, Lil?” Papa asked. “Did you see your pretty doll?”

“I saw it,” she said sulkily.

“What’s wrong?” asked Mama.

Silence.

“Oh, Mama, you know Lily is never excited by presents!” her brother laughed.“Come out and watch me ride!”

And so they did.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Questions:

11)) Why was Lily's anger describedas palpable?

A. It was misplaced. B. It was irrational. C. It was very difficult to

understand. D. It was so intense it seemed like

it could be touched.

22)) Which is the best antonymfor insurmountable?

A. sane B. phony C. unjustified D. conquerable

33)) Which best describes the act ofbeing relegated?

A. A star athlete is given a covetedaward.

B. A disobedient dog is put in thegarage to sleep.

C. A struggling student is given theworst grade in the class.

D. The birthday boy is taken to hisfavorite restaurant.

44)) What does the expression par forthe course imply?

A. that something is to be expected B. that something cannot be

undone C. that something is sure to cause

anger D. that something was meant to be

hurtful

55)) What is ironic about the title of thispassage?

A. Lily has a big problem. B. Tommy is perfectly happy. C. Lily does not get a mini bike. D. No one realizes there is a

problem.

66)) What could the author have writtenif she wanted to show Lily improvingher situation?

A. a scene with Lily storming out ofthe house

B. a description of Lily getting toride the mini bike first

C. a paragraph describing Lilypretending to appreciate the doll

D. a dialogue with Lily explaining to

her family why she was so angry

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



77)) Which is the best antonymfor fervor ?

A. gluttonyB. indifferenceC. politenessD. quiet

88)) What might Lily's parents beaccused of?


A. □ being stingy

B. □ not loving Lily

C. □ being insensitive

D. □ being gender biased

99)) In paragraph 6, what is the most likereason the author repeats the word

"doll"?

A. to highlight how extravagant thedolls were

B. to juxtapose the number of dollswith just one mini bike

C. to make it clear howmonotonous this gift hadbecome for Lily

D. to make it clear that the doll shegot this Christmas was the worst

of all

1100)) Which is the best antonymfor seethed?

A. cheered upB. calmed downC. spoke softly D. breathed heavily

What would you do if you were in Lily’s position? Explain.

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““TThhee NNeeww SScchhooooll”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


Tracey is starting a new school today.

She is very sad. She is very scared.

“I don’t want to go to school today,” Tracey tells her dad.

“I understand, sweetheart,” Dad says. “Starting a new school can be very scary.”

Tracey has moved to a new town. She has moved to a new house. She isstarting a new school today. She has done all of this in a week!

“I feel sick,” Tracey says. “My stomach hurts. I can’t eat breakfast.”

“I think that is because you are nervous,” Dad says. He brushes Tracey’s hairdown. He gives her a little hug. “Try drinking just a little juice. Then I will walk youto school.”

Tracey and her dad walk to school.

Tracey thinks about many things.Will I make friends?Will I like my teacher?What if I don’t know the answer to a question?

Will kids laugh at me?What if no one likes me?

“We’re here,” says Dad.

Tracey looks up at the big building. Her other school was small.

Tracey wishes she could run away.

She knows she cannot.

She takes a deep breath.

She walks up the steps to school.She walks into her third grade classroom.

“That must be Tracey,” she hears a boy say.

“Hello, Tracey!”

“Welcome, Tracey!”

“Let me show you around.”

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Everyone seems kind. Tracey feels a little better.

She is still not happy. She is still a little scared. She cannot eat her lunch.

Dad picks Tracey up after school.

“How was your day?” he asks.

“Okay,” she says.

“It will get better,” Dad says. “Big changes are hard.”

“I know,” says Tracey. She reaches for her dad’s hand to hold as they walkhome.

Questions:

11)) Why is Tracey sad and scared?

A. She is moving to a new housetoday.

B. She is moving to a new town today. C. She is starting a new school today. D. She is walking to school alone

today.

22)) What has Tracey done during theweek?


A. □ made a new friend

B. □ gone to a new church

C. □ moved to a new town

D. □ moved to a new house

33)) What grade is Tracey in?

A. ____________________

____________________

____________________

44)) Why can't Tracey eat breakfast?

A. She has no food. B. Her stomach hurts. C. She is late for school. D. She does not like the food.

55)) Why does Tracey's dad think she feels

sick?

A. because she is sleepyB. because she is nervousC. because she has a coldD. because she ate too much

66)) In this story, what

does nervous mean?

A. to be happy B. to be hungry C. to be mad D. to be scared

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



77)) What does Dad tell Tracey to dobefore school?

A. stop cryingB. get her bagC. drink some juiceD. put on her shoes

88)) How do Tracey and Dad get toschool?

A. ____________________

____________________

____________________

99)) What does Tracey think about mostas she walks?

A. mathB. readingC. having friendsD. her teachers

1100)) When does Tracey seem to bebrave?

A. when she cannot eatB. when she feels betterC. when she holds her dad's handD. when she walks up the steps to

the school

1111)) What is Tracey's new school like?

A. big B. dirty C. loud D. small

1122)) How do the children in Tracey'sclass seem?

A. kindB. prettyC. funnyD. not very nice

Have you ever felt nervous about doing something new? Explain.

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““TThhee OOcceeaann””

RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – –

SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below.

The ocean is big.

The ocean is blue.

The ocean has waves.

Some waves are small. Some waves are very small. They are tiny!

Some waves are big. Some waves are very big. They are huge!

In some places, the ocean is very deep.

In some places, you cannot see the bottom.

Questions:

11)) Is the ocean small or big?

A. The ocean is small. B. The ocean is big.

22)) What color is the ocean?

A. blue B. yellow C. brown

33)) What is the ocean made of?

A. airB. waterC. fire

44)) What does tiny mean?

A. small B. very small C. big D. very big

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



55)) What does huge mean?

A. small B. very small C. big D. very big

66)) Why can't you see the bottom ofthe ocean in some places?

A. because the ocean is dirty

B. because the ocean is deep

C. because the ocean has manywaves

77)) Which words can we use todescribe the ocean?

▼Check three that are correct.

A. □ big

B. □ blue

C. □ happy

D. □ tiny

E. □ deep

Do you like the ocean? What do you like about it? What don ’t you like about it?

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““TThhee PPaar r kk”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


Reem likes to go to the park with her mom.

She likes to play at the park with her friends.

Today when Reem goes to the park, she looks around and becomes very sad.

“What is wrong, Reem?” Mom asks.

“There is so much trash on the ground,” Reem says. “It seems like each day, I seemore trash here.”

Reem and her mom look around.

There are old boxes on the ground.

There are popped balloons on the ground.

There are old cans, too.

“You are right,” Mom says. “The park is very dirty.”

“What can we do?” Reem asks.

“I am sure you will think of something,” Mom says.

Reem and her mom go home. Reem paints a picture of a park. She uses blue,green, brown and yellow paint.

PLEASE KEEP OUR PARK CLEAN, she writes in big letters on top of her picture.

“Let’s go back to the park, Mom,” Reem says.

“Okay,” Mom says.

Reem grabs a bunch of trash bags to take with her. She also brings along sometape.

When Reem gets to the park, she tapes her picture on a big trashcan.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


“Here you go!” she says to her mom. She hands Mom a bag. “Will you help mepick up the trash?”

“I sure will,” Mom says.

The children at the park run over to see what is going on.

Reem hands them bags. “Let’s clean this place up,” she says.

The children pick up lots of trash. They talk and laugh as they work. Soon all thebags are full.

“We need to come back another day. There is still some trash on the ground,”Reem says. “But the park looks much better.”

“It does,” Mom says. “I knew you would think of some way to help.”

Questions:

11)) Why is Reem sad?

A. her friends are not at the park B. she cannot find her mom C. there is a lot of trash at the park D. she hurts herself on the slide

22)) What is on the ground?


A. □ old cans

B. □ old boxes

C. □ old food

D. □ old shoes

33)) What does Reem do when she getshome?

A. ____________________

_______________________

_______________________

44)) Where does Reem put her picture?

A. ____________________

_______________________

_______________________

55)) Why does Reem tape her picture tothe trashcan?

A. so people can see it B. so it falls to the ground C. so people get mad D. She is tired of holding it

66)) Who helps Reem pick up trash?


A. □ her dad

B. □ her mom

C. □ no one

D. □ other children

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



77)) What does Reem give the children?

A. brooms

B. gifts C. mops D. trash bags

88)) What does Reem learn at the park?

A. that she can help make things

betterB. that people do not care about

the parkC. that her mom does not like to

pick up trashD. that the park has no trashcans

99)) How might Reem and her friendsfeel after cleaning up?

A. funnyB. goodC. madD. sad

1100)) How does the park look aftereveryone cleans it up?

A. all cleanB. betterC. very dirtyD. more dirty

1111)) Why does Reem say that shewill come back another day?

A. to play at the park

B. to clean up more trashC. to empty the trash bagsD. to show her dad her work

Can you think of other ways to fight pollution and preserve the environment?

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““TThhee RReenntt MMaann”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


Someone is knocking on Amanda’s door.

Amanda is home, but she does not answer.

It is the man who owns the house where she lives.His name is Mr. Campbell. Amanda calls him the Rent Man.

He has come by to get the rent money Amanda owes.

Amanda does not have the money to pay him.

Amanda lost her job at the auto factory three weeks ago.

“I worked there for 15 years,” Amanda thinks to herself. She is bitter . “But it tookthem just one day to take my job away.”

Amanda has no idea when she will find another job. Lots of other people from herfactory lost their jobs three weeks ago too.

She looks for work every day.

She looks for work at a restaurant. “You have never worked at a restaurant,” theowner tells her. “This job is not for you.”

She looks for work at the bookstore. “We don’t have any jobs right now,” the clerktells Amanda.

She looks for work at the grocery store. “I will call you to let you know,” themanager says.

Amanda is worried. She is running out of money quickly.

There is another loud knock at the door. Amanda sits quietly in her kitchen. Shehopes the Rent Man will go away soon.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Questions:

11)) Who is knocking at Amanda's door?

A. the restaurant owner B. the clerk C. Mr. Campbell D. the manager

22)) What does Mr. Campbell want?

A. a book B. a car C. a job D. money

33)) Why doesn't Amanda answer thedoor?

A. She is sick.

B. She is not home. C. She has no money. D. She doesn't hear it.

44)) When did Amanda lose her job?

A. ____________________

_______________________

_______________________

55)) If Amanda is bitter , how does shefeel?

A. hateful and angry B. happy and sure

C. hungry and tired D. quiet and alone

66)) What seems to be the reason Amanda lost her job at the factory?

A. She was bitter. B. She was a bad worker.

C. She had worked there too long. D. Business was slow.

77)) Where does Amanda look for a new job?


A. □ a restaurant

B. □ another factory

C.□

a bookstore D. □ a grocery store

88)) Which job might Amanda get?

A. none of themB. the restaurant job C. the bookstore jobD. the grocery store job

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



99)) Where is Amanda?

A. ____________________

_______________________

_______________________

_______________________

_______________________

1100)) What helpful thing could Amandahave said if she had opened thedoor?

A. She could have told Mr.Campbell that she lost her job.

B. She could have told Mr.Campbell to go away.

C. She could have told Mr.Campbell to stop knocking.

D. She could have told Mr.Campbell she was bitter.

1111)) What might Mr. Campbell do next?


A. □ knock the door down

B. □ come back another day

C. □ offer Amanda a job

D. □ call Amanda on the phone

1122)) Why does Amanda sit quietly?

A. so she can thinkB. so she can hear the doorC. so Mr. Campbell will not know

she is homeD. because Mr. Campbell told her

to

Is Mr. Campbell a bad man? Why or why not?

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



““TThhee RRuunnaawwaayy”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


My name is Uma.

I was 17 when I ran away from home for good.

I stole $45 from my Dad’s drawer one morning. He had already left for work.I stuffed some clothes in my backpack.

I headed for the bus station.I caught the first bus that came in.

It did not matter to me where I was going.It just mattered that I was leaving.

I ended up in Springfield, Massachusetts.

I got here around sunset.

My first night here, I was scared.I was alone.I slept behind an old store so no one would see me.

It was December. I was so cold.

Today, I am still in Springfield. I am 28-years-old. I have a kid who is 11.

I wait tables at a restaurant. The food is not so good. The people who eat thereare not so nice.

I think about my dad sometimes.

“Do I have a grandma?” my kid asks.

“No,” I say.

“Do I have a grandpa?” he asks.

“Not to speak of,” I say. That is when I think of my dad.

I think about what he is doing.

I think about if he misses me or not.I don’t miss him much at all. But it’s nice to feel like someone misses you.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Questions:

11)) What does for good mean in thisstory?

A. forever B. for a little while C. to have a good time D. to make things better

22)) How old was Uma when she ranaway?

A. 11 B. 16 C. 17 D. 28

33)) Where did Uma get $45?

A. She stole it. B. She borrowed it. C. She worked for it. D. She got it from her drawer.

44)) How did Uma run away?

A. she walked B. she drove C. she caught the bus D. she caught the train

55)) Why might Uma not have caredwhere the bus was going?

A. She was very tired. B. She wanted to get away fast. C. Her friends were on the bus. D. She did not want to catch the

train.

66)) What kind of person does Umaseem to be?

A. honest B. funny C. pretty D. sad

77)) Why did Uma sleep behind thestore?

A. so she could buy food B. so no one would see her C. there were other people there D. her friends asked her to

88)) In what month did Uma run away?

A. ____________________

____________________

____________________

99)) Where does Uma work?

A. at a school B. at a restaurant C. at a bakery D. at a store

1100)) When does Uma think about herDad?

A. all the time B. every December C. when her child asks about

grandpaD. when she works at the

restaurant

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



1111)) What does Uma say about herselfin the story?


A. □ She is a runaway.

B. □ She is sad.

C. □ She lives in Springfield,Massachusetts.

D. □ She wants a new job.

1122)) Given what you know about thestory, what will Uma probably donext?

A. find her dadB. go back homeC. kiss her childD. see a movie with her husband

1133)) Why does Uma run away fromhome?

A. because her dad abuses herB. because she is scaredC. because she stole money from

her dadD. The story does not say why.

Is it ever a good idea to run away? Explain.

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““TThhee SSttoor r mm”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


“Crack-crack…kowowww! Thunder, and a shock of lightening etched its reflectionupon the corrugated metal siding,” Rowan read aloud.

She worked to read clearly, with depth and emotion. Her eyes scanned the pageto the next paragraph. She took a breath to continue, but was interrupted by heryounger brother Nolan, stretched out on the living room couch, flicking a pencilagainst his forehead.

“I was never a big fan of onomatopoeia,” Nolan said, in his usual, supercilious,manner. “It is impossible to write words that truly sound like a thunderstorm, a jar

opening or a falling tree, yes? But, do continue.”

Rowan sucked her teeth. “That‟s why I can‟t stand do ing this in front of you, Nolli.You are no help at all. Haven‟t you something better to do?”

“Ha! Better than to annoy you before your moment of reckoning? I don‟t think so.”Rowan‟s enjoyment of getting under his big sister‟s skin was fully conspicuous.

“Nolli, please keep quiet!” Mother broke in. “This is important. Rowan presents inless than an hour. She needs to focus. Row, sweetheart, please continue.”

Mother‟s comments seemed to assuage Rowan‟s irritation. She cleared herthroat and continued where she had left off. “Farmer John knew this was a stormof epic proportion. Even the cows retreated to their hutches. Not one person inthe…”

“The cows retreated ? The cows retreated ?” Nolan chortled upon hearing therepetition of this line in his own voice. “That‟s great. Even the stupid cowsretreated! Oh, man. That must have been one heck of a storm-a-brewin‟. Mama,I‟m scared!” Nolan howled at the ceiling and curled up into a tight little ball oflaughter.

“Nolli!” Mother Ann turned and shouted. The loudness of her voice

was tantamount to the rumbling storm Rowan was trying to capture in herreading.

Mother began laying into the boy, castigating him most thoroughly about hisrudeness and lack of respect for Rowan‟s preparations. After her outburst,Mother sighed rather contentedly; she felt as though she had achieved theintended effect. Sometimes she even surprised herself at the fury by which, ifcompletely necessary, she could quell any quarrel.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Nolan had fallen silent. He actually appeared remorseful.

“Oh, Mother.” Rowan sighed, crumpling to the floor, despondent . “It‟s no use. “„The Storm‟ shall be the end of me”

“Ahh, but Rowan, my dear,” Mother rejoined, “this is but a mere shower!”

Questions:

11)) Given what Nolan says in the passage, which bestdescribes onomatopoeia?

A. a story that is told orally B. the vocal imitation of a sound C. repetition of the initial letter soundD. the repetition of similar vowel sounds

22)) Why does Rowan get upset with Nolan?


A. □ because he is being obnoxious

B. □ because he interrupts her reading

C. □ because he dislikes onomatopoeia

D. □ because he is stretched out on the couch

33)) What does it mean tobe supercilious ?

A. to be haughty B. to be comical

C. to be gifted with wordsD. to be young and smart

44)) What does the reader learn throughRowan's actions?

A. He does not like his sister.B. He enjoys being annoying.

C. He wants to give a readinghimself.

D. He has heard the passagebefore.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



55)) What might Nolan be referring to when he talks about Rowan's "moment of

reckoning"?

A. the end of her life B. an upcoming presentation C. a time when Mother will yell at Rowan D. a time when Nolan will annoy Rowan even more

66)) Rewrite the following sentence: Mother‟s comments seemedto assuage Rowan‟s irritation.

A. Mother's comments make Rowan feel worse.B. Mother's comments do nothing to help Rowan.C. Mother's comments help to ease Rowan's irritation.D. Mother's comments prove that Rowan is rightfully irritated.

77)) What seems to cause Nolan to feelremorseful?

A. His mother scolding him. B. Rowan falling to the floor.

C. He thinks about how he wouldfeel.

D. His sister's nervousness abouther presentation.

88)) Why might Rowan feeldespondent?

A. She is totally angry with herbrother.

B. She feels her mother is babyingher.

C. She feels practicing is hopeless. D. She is ready to leave for the

presentation.

99)) What might Mother mean when she tells Rowan, "This is but a mereshower."?

A. It has started to rain outside.

B. The piece Rowan is to read is juvenile. C. Mother's anger with Nolan was just for show. D. This is nothing compared to what Rowan will go through later.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



1100)) If X is tantamount to Y, what is their relationship?

A. X is greater than Y.

B. X is less than Y. C. X equals Y. D. X and Y have no connection.

1111)) If Mother is castigating Nolan,what is she doing?

A. yelling at him B. spanking him C. threatening him

D. criticizing his actions

1122)) When is Rowan to present?

A. ____________________

____________________

____________________

Who is your favorite character in this story? Why?

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““TThhee SSuunn””

RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – –

SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess Directions: Read the story. Then answer the questions below.

The sun is in the sky.

It is yellow.

It is a star.

The sun gives the earth light and heat.

It helps plants grow.

Questions:

11)) What color is the sun?

A. green B. white C. yellow

22)) Where is the sun?

A. in the sky B. in the earth C. near the plants

33)) How would the earth be with no sun?

A. light and coldB. hot and darkC. dark and cold

Is the sun good? Why?

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““TTiimmee wwiitthh GGr r aannddppaa”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


Ben jumped from bed as soon as the first bit of sun peeped throughhis window. He grabbed his backpack from his closet and opened it on the floor.

Ben put in some of his favorite things to take with him on his trip to visit Grandpa.He put in a book on building forts, a book on making go-carts and a new book hehad gotten from the library about a kid detective who creates his own spy gear.He also put in a model car kit and his stuffed bear. He was ready to go!

Going to visit his grandfather for a week by himself was always Ben’s favoritepart of summer vacation. Grandpa would take him fishing and to baseball games.Grandpa also taught Ben how to fix things around the house.

Last year, when he was eight-years-old, Ben had learned how to replace abroken doorknob and how to fix a leaky faucet. Grandpa was patient and did notmind taking many hours to show Ben how to use his tools.

Ben’s mom stuck her head in his bedroom door. “Grandpa’s here,” she said witha smile.

Ben grabbed his backpack and ran into the kitchen where Grandpa was waiting.

“Ready, big guy?” asked Grandpa. “Or do you want to eat breakfast before weleave?”

“Ready,” said Ben. As he kissed his mother goodbye, he felt his stomach rumble.“We can eat later!”

Questions:

11)) What is the most likely reason Ben jumps out of bed?

A. He is late.B. He is scared. C. He is excited. D. He is worried.

22)) How old is Ben?

A. ____________________

____________________

____________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Questions:

33)) What time of year is it?

A. ____________________

____________________

____________________

44)) What is Ben’s favorite part ofsummer vacation?

A. fixing stuff B. going fishing C. visiting his grandfather D. going to a baseball game

55)) In the fourth paragraph, what is themeaning of the word pat ient ?

A. very slow

B. sick in the hospital C. good about sharing D. taking time without complaint

66)) Judging by the things Ben put in hisbackpack, what does he like to domost?

A. make things B. ride go-carts C. spy on people D. read big books

77)) Where and when does this storytake place?

A. at Grandpa’s house in the earlyafternoon B. at Ben’s house in the early

afternoon C. at Grandpa’s house in the

morning D. at Ben’s house in the morning

88)) According to the story, what is oneof the things Ben’s Grandpa taughthim to do?

A. use a drill B. build a fort

C. fix a leaky faucet D. build a model car

99)) What is the most likely reason Bendid not eat breakfast?

A. He was not hungry.B. He did not like his mother’s

cooking.C. He wanted to leave for his

grandpa's house.D. He had already eaten.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““TTr r aacckkss”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


Lida sat outside her great Aunt‟s hotel,watching the steam engines go by andlistening to the clop-clop of horses as theypulled wagons down the cobbled road.She was taking a short break from tending toall her chores at the inn: mopping the ballroom,fixing the cornbread for guests, and tendingthe fire in the wood burning stove.

Lida had an assiduous nature and always strove to make sure her tasks were

done properly and without waste of time. However, today she took aquick respite to daydream about the party she would be going to that evening.

At 17, it would be her first. Her friends had all picked out brightly colored dressesto wear. Lida, being extremely demure, chose a simple, but pretty, dress in acharcoal gray.

“Are you ready, Miss Lida?” Hattie asked as she burst in through the parlor doorsand into the kitchen. Mary and Florence were in step right behind her.

“Hattie, I done told you never to come in that way. You disturb the guests havingcocktails in the parlor!”

“Oh hush, Lida. You worry too much. Let‟s go.”

“I need to put a few more logs in the stove so Auntie can boil water for thedishes,” Lida said. “Then we can go.”

Hattie gave a sigh, but did not bother to argue. She knew when Lida hadsomething to do, she didn‟t rest until it was done.

“Let‟s take the tracks,” Hattie said when they finally headed out to the party.Daylight was turning into dusk.

“Naw, Hattie,” Lida said. "You know that‟s too dangerous in the night.”

“Look, Lida,” Hattie said tersely. “We‟re runnin‟ late „cause of you. The tracks willtake 15 minutes off our walk.” Mary and Florence mumbled in agreement.

Against her better judgment, Lida agreed to take the train tracks. It was her firstparty ever. Why deal with acrimony and ill feelings?

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


The girls slowly navigated tracks in the dark and talked excitedly about thedance. Lida heard a whistle in the distance. “We‟ve gotta get off the track. Train‟scoming.”

The girls quickly scurried off the side. In the dark, Lida heard a thud and a gasp.

“Help!” screamed Hattie. She had fallen in the ash pit, a 6 foot trench about 20

feet long between the rails where trains stopped to empty ashes from engine‟sfire box when they pulled through town.

Hattie screamed and tried frantically to climb out, but she was too short to grabhold to the top of the pit. The train was getting closer, the whistle more piercing.

Not wanting to appear scared herself, Lida dissembled and refused to let hervoice show panic.

“Just give me your hand, Hattie, and I‟ll pull ya right out.”

They fumbled for each others hands in the dark. Lida lay down on the rails andhooked her feet under the track to give herself some leverage. She pulled andpulled while Mary and Florence screamed in the dark.

One final pull got Hattie out the pit. They ran off the edge of track to safety as thetrain pulled to a stop and dropped its load of torrid ashes.

Questions:

11)) Which idea can best be supported by what is said in this passage?

A. Lida lives in a big house. B. Lida and her family are poor. C. Lida and Hattie are best friends. D. Lida is treated poorly at the hotel. E. This story takes place a long time ago.

22)) What is the most likely reason the author included the following paragraph?

"Hattie gave a sigh, but did not bother to argue. She knew when Lida had

something to do, she didn’t rest until it was done."

A. to set the reader up for Lida's heroic efforts B. to explain why the girls would be late to the party C. to let the reader know how mature Lida was D. to let the reader know how much Lida and Hattie argue

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



33)) What is the best definitonof assiduous?

A. careful B. efficient C. energetic D. hardworking E. non complaining

44)) Which is the best antonymfor respite?

A. continuation B. directness C. erect stance D. morning break E. afternoon nap

55)) Using the passage as a guide, howdo Hattie and Lida differ?

A. Hattie is good-natured; Lida isstoic.

B. Hattie is trusting; Lida iscircumspect.

C. Hattie is carefree; Lida isresponsible.

D. Hattie is respectful; Lida is judgmental.

E. Hattie is excited about the party;Lida is ambivalent about it.

66)) What type of characters are Maryand Florence?

A. round, characterized by beingwell-developed in the story

B. foils, characterized by bringingout each other's traits throughcontrast

C. confidantes, characterized bybeing people the main characterconfides in

D. flat, characterized as doing verylittle to advance plot

E. dynamic, characterized by

changing during the passage

77)) What conflicts are illustrated in thispassage?


A. □ character versus character

B. □ character versus nature

C. □ character versus machine

D. □ character versus destiny

E. □ character versus society

88)) What is the best definitionof demure?

A. boringB. innocentC. innocuousD. reservedE. self-conscious

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




for acrimony?

A. agreement B. bad judgment C. happiness D. positive attitude E. timeliness

1100)) If the ashes were torrid, which best

describes what they would theyhave done to Hattie?

A. poisoned her B. suffocated her C. burned her badly D. gotten her all dirty E. weighed her down

1111)) Why did Lida feel the need

to dissemble her panic?

A. so that she could gather herstrength

B. so that she would not fall intothe pit herself

C. so that she could appear calmfor Hattie

D. so that she could hear howclose the train was

E. so that she could come up withan idea to save her friend

Have you ever needed a hand? Explain.

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““TTr r eeeess”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


Trees have three parts.

The roots pull up water and food for the tree from under the ground.

The trunk is the stem of the tree. It has bark on it. It helps food getto the branches.

The crown is at the top of the tree. Branches, leaves, seeds and flowers are all

part of the crown.

Questions:

11)) What is this passage about?

A. what trees eat B. how trees grow C. the parts of a tree

22)) What part of the tree isunderground?

A. the crown B. the roots C. the trunk

33)) If a tree has no roots, whathappens?

A. It cannot eat.B. It can grow fast.C. It has more branches.

44)) What are the three main parts of atree?

A. water, food, and seedsB. roots, trunk, and crownC. branches, leaves, and bark

Do you like trees? What is your favorite kind of tree? Why?

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““UUr r ssuullaa PPuugghh”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


Ursula Pugh was at an earlier time in her life – before injuries,before a disastrous marriage, before the death of her belovedsister – a glorious dancer.

Now, she was regarded by many as an angry has-been andhorrible teacher.

I was not cognizant of these details as I made my way through the doors of TheUrsula Children’s Theater with my three rambunctious boys in tow. And had I had

such information it would not have biased my decision in the least.

I was looking for a safe haven in the neighborhood for the boys to hang out afterschool until I got off work. Staying at home by themselves was not an option.They definitely needed adult supervision if I expected my home to still bestanding when I got home from work. The children’s theater, much to myboys’ chagrin, was more convenient for me to get to than the karate studio.

“No Mama, we want karate,” the boys had implored pitifully. I’m glad I wasn’tswayed though I would not realize until much later what a fortuitous decisionthis was.

Ms. Pugh looked up over her glasses as we arrived at the studio. “Boys!” sheexclaimed before I could even introduce myself. “Wonderful.”

It turned out that Ms. Pugh’s program was woefully short of boys and mine wereimmediately thrown into every production possible at the theater.

The rumors were right, in some respects. Ms. Pugh could be brusque and rudewith her charges and did not tolerate any signs that a student was not fullydedicated to the program.

My boys flourished in this environment. My wild, rough boys, who were often sorude that they embarrassed me in public, gradually became a different species.

They will certainly never be world class dancers, but Ms. Pugh’s strict waystaught them to be respectful and on time. Moreover, it taught them to followdirections and always strive to do their best.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Questions:

11)) Which idea can be supported from

the first paragraph?

A. Ms. Pugh is a bitter woman. B. Ms. Pugh is an old woman. C. Ms. Pugh has been through a

lot. D. Ms. Pugh was a world class

ballerina.E. Ms. Pugh has become a dance

teacher.


for cognizant?

A. aware B. forgetful C. ignorant D. mindful E. resentful

33)) What does the term safehaven imply?

A. a refugeB. a theater programC. a religious buildingD. a healthy alternativeE. an inexpensive activity

44)) Which is the best antonymfor chagrin?

A. ambivalence B. calm C. confusion D. delight E. ignorance

55)) Which is the best antonymfor biased?

A. awkward B. impartial C. concerned D. attentive E. determined

66)) Why was the narrator'sdecision fortuitous?

A. The children's theater was closeto her home.

B. Her sons learned many valuablelife lessons.

C. She expected her sons tobecome good dancers.

D. She got to see Ms. Pugh's bad

temper first hand. EE.. There were not many boys inthe program for her sons to getin trouble with.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



77)) Which best describes the literary technique used in the following sentence.

"My wild, rough boys, who were often so rude they embarrassed me in public,

gradually became a different species."

A. literal, meaning it is to be understood exactly as it is writtenB. figurative, meaning not intended to be interpreted in its literal senseC. foreshadowing, meaning it offers hints and clues of what is to comeD. inversion, meaning a reversal of the usual order of words for emphasisE. symbolism, meaning a person that has meaning in itself also stands for

something larger

88)) What is the main conflict in this passage?

A. man verses manB. man verses himselfC. man verses societyD. man verses machine E. man verses nature

Would you enjoy being a part of Ms. Pugh ’s theater class? Why or why not?

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““VVeett EEmmeer r ggeennccyy!!”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


It is 10:00 on a Saturday night. The doors to the animal emergency roomfly open.

Cyrus carries a tiny black lab puppy into the building.

"Save him. Please!" the man cries. "He ran out into the street and got hit by acar."

The puppy is whining. There is a lot of blood.

Dr. Williams comes from behind the desk. She reads the puppy’s name tag.

“Here, let me take Lobo from you,” Dr. Williams tells Cyrus gently. “I will take himin the back for x-rays and see what needs to be done.”

When Dr. Williams gets to the back, she takes a closer look at Lobo. Her facelooks grim. She can see the dog's leg is broken badly. She fears there is otherdamage she cannot see.

The assistants in the room are silent. Everyone knows that Lobo may not survive.If he does survive, his leg injury may be so severe that walking will be hard forhim to do.

The x-rays show that Lobo’s front leg has been broken in three places . He is alsobleeding inside.

Dr. Williams gets to work. She knows she must stop the bleeding quickly.

The surgery takes two hours. Dr. Williams fixes the damage to Lobo's leg. Shestops the bleeding inside his chest.

“I will go tell Lobo’s owner that this little pup is going to make it,” Dr. Williamssays. “We’ll see in a few weeks how well he will walk again.”

Questions:

11)) Where does this story take place?

A. in a police station B. in a waiting room C. in a doctor's office D. in an animal hospital

22)) What does the mood in the roomseem to be?

A. angry B. joyful C. relaxed D. tense

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



33)) When does Dr. Williams know justhow badly Lobo has been hurt?

A. when Cyrus asks for help B. when she takes a closer look C. when she sees Lobo is a lab

puppy D. when the doors to the

emergency room fly open

44)) Around what time did Lobo'ssurgery end?

A. 10:00 at night B. 10:00 in the morning C. noon D. midnight

55)) Which is the best antonym for grim?

A. calm

B. serious C. hopeful D. beautiful

66)) How long is Lobo in surgery?

A. ____________________

____________________

____________________

77)) What kind of doctor is Dr. Williams?

A. a pediatrician B. a dentist

C. an internist D. a veterinarian

88)) What does it mean to havea severe injury?

A. to have a mild injury

B. to not be able to run C. to not be able to walk D. to have a very bad injury

99)) In how many places was Lobo's legbroken?

A. ____________________

____________________

____________________

1100)) What does the reader know aboutLobo by the end of the story?


A. □ He will survive.

B. □ He will walk fine. C. □ He is a black lab.

D. □ He got hit by a car.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



““WWaannggaa”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


I, Nancy Norris, believer of nothing, order my spell kit on the Internet.

I feel pretty silly, but I have run out of more sane ideas.

I have looked in the want ads. I have sent my resume to a million companies. Ihave gone to businesses up and down my block asking for work.

I need a job. I need money. I need these things fast. I am desperate.

I am about to lose my house. I am about to lose my car. I have been out of work

for 8 months.

The Internet is free at the library. This is a very good thing. I see a site that sellswitch doctor spell kits.

WARNING: Do not ask for something unless you truly want it to come true!

There are Love Kits. These get someone to love you back. There are New LifeKits. These make you happy. There are Money Kits. These bring you money,riches and an easy life.

Of course, I choose the Money Kit. This is what I need. I truly want it to come

true.

I have $20 left on my credit card. I use it all to order my spell kit. Don’t laugh.

The kit arrives in three days, as promised. I hope the spell works more quickly.

Inside the kit is a wanga doll. The doll has been blessed by an actual witchdoctor and is a very important part of making my spell come true. That is whatthe box says, anyway.

Wanga is about 6 inches tall. It has bushy black hair. It is dressed in a furry outfit

that looks like a bathrobe. Hopefully, he will be my new best friend.

There are three different powders in the kit. Each has its own separate bag.

The kit also comes with a set of detailed instructions. I am to follow them exactly.

I spread the powders out on the floor and place my wanga doll next to them. Ihope for the best. My mortgage is due tomorrow.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


Questions:

11)) What is the meaning of theword sane ?

A. something that is foolish B. something that is powerful C. something that makes sense D. something that makes money

22)) Why does Nancy order a spell kit?


A. □ She needs a job. B. □ She needs money.

C. □ She wants a boyfriend.

D. □ She wants to be a witch.

33)) Given what is said in the passage,what is another way to write thefollowing sentence?

“ I am desperate .

”

A. I am crazy.B. I full of hope.C. I am willing to try anything.D. I am not sure about anything

anymore.

44)) What can be said about Nancy fromthis passage?

A. She is well read.

B. She is very serious. C. She was once very wealthy. D. She can make fun of herself.

55)) What does it mean for somethingto come true ?

A. It happens. B. It tells the truth. C. It brings money. D. It is a fairy tale.

66)) Which kit does Nancy order?

A. ____________________

_______________________

_______________________

77)) What does the wanga doll look like?


A. □ It is black.

B. □ It is 6 inches tall.

C. □ It has bushy hair.

D. □ It has on a furry outfit.

88)) Which sentence from the story ismost likely an exaggeration?

A. I need a job.

B. Wanga is about 6 inches tall.C. The kit arrives in three days, aspromised.

D. I have sent my resume to amillion companies.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



99)) According to the story, why would aperson buy the New Life Kit?

A. to have a baby B. to become happy C. to move to a new town D. to be cured from sickness

1100)) What is special about the wangadoll?

A. It is full of money.B. It has bushy black hair.C. It is Nancy’s best friend. D. It has been blessed by a witch

doctor.

1111)) How long does it take for the kit toarrive?

A. ____________________

_______________________

_______________________

1122)) What would be the oppositeof detailed instructions?

A. many instructions

B. basic instructions C. specific instructions D. funny instructions

1133)) How does Nancy pay for her spellkit?

A. with cash B. with a check

C. with a credit card D. with a money order

Are you superstitious? Why or why not?

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““WWhhaatt NNuummbbeer r ??”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


Becca and Kai played together all day.

The two friends played outside in the morning. They rode bikes and scooters.

They ate lunch on the porch. Becca’s mom made sandwiches and lemonade.

They played hide and seek in the house right after lunch.

Then they did not know what to do.

“I know! Let’s play the number game,” said Becca. “What number am I thinkingof?”

“Is it five?” asked Kai.

“No, it is higher than five,” Becca said.

“Okay, is it one hundred?”

“No, it is lower than one hundred,” Becca said.

“Let’s see,” said Kai. “Is it sixty?”

Becca gave Kai a hint . “It is between twenty and thirty.”

“Hmm, is it twenty-five?”

“No, but you are very close !” Becca said. “Well, is it higher or lower than twenty-five?”

“It is lower,” Becca said.

“Okay, I think I know. Is it twenty-two?”

“Yeah! You guessed it.” Becca said. “Good job!”

Questions:

11)) Where did Becca and Kai play

today?

A. They played at school.B. They played at the park.C. They played at Kai's house. D. They played at Becca's house.

22)) What did Becca and Kai do in the

morning?


A. □ rode bikes

B. □ rode scooters

C. □ played outside

D. □ played hide and seek

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



33)) Where did Becca and Kai eatlunch?

A. ________________

44)) Whose idea was it to play thenumber game?

A. It was Kai’s idea.

B. It was Mom’s idea. C. It was Becca’s idea. D. It was Kai and Becca’s idea.

55)) What was Kai’s second guess?

A. fiveB. twenty-twoC. sixtyD. one hundred

66)) What is another way to write thenumber sixty ?

A. 6B. 16CC.. 60

DD

.

. 66

77)) Which sentence is correct?

A. 178 is lower than 177.BB.. 178 is higher than 177. CC.. 178 is between 177. DD.. 178 is the same as 177.

88)) ▼Check all that are correct.

A. □ 224 is lower than 256.

B. □ 224 is higher than 256.

C. □ 224 is between 220 and 230.

D. □ 224 is between 220 and 210.

99)) Why was Kai's guess of twenty-five close ?

A. Twenty-five is a big number.BB.. It is near the number Becca was

thinking about. CC.. It is far away from the number

Becca was thinking. DD.. Twenty-five is lower than the

number Becca was thinking.

1100)) What does it mean to givesomeone a hint ?

A. to give someone a clueB. to make a question hardC. to tell someone to give upD. to give someone the answer

1111)) What number was Becca thinkingabout?

A. ___________________

1122)) What other number could Beccahave been thinking about?

A. ten B. fifteen C. twenty-three DD.. twenty-eight

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““WWiilldd”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


I was 16 when my father unequivocally decided that he would send me towilderness camp for several months. He had threatened many times before, butmy mother had always managed to persuade him from actually packing me upand shipping me off.

My latest transgression was viewed as the last straw . In a fit of unbridled rage, Ihad shoved my math teacher down a flight of steps at school. He broke his armin two places and severely dislocated his shoulder. The man hadn’t done a thingto me. I am hard pressed to remember why I was so irritated at him.

Anyway, Mr. Ford, my math teacher, had agreed not to press charges as favor tomy dad. He was a friend of my dad’s from way back. Mr. Ford knew what was atstake. We all did.

Dad was in the middle of a tight race for sheriff in our town. This latest “DannyThing,” as all of my reckless behavior was now called, had all my dad’s closestadvisors talking.

“John, he’s your son and he’s a kid, but he is dragging you down,” I heard JakeHutch tell my dad through his closed office door the night after I pushed Mr. Ford.“If it appears you can’t set the course for enforcement in your own home, how

can you set the course for this town?”

So, off to the Pisgah National Forest I went. I knew in my heart that “WildernessCamp” was surely just a euphemism for “Torture Center.” I imagined hours ofuntold abuse at the hands of some lumberjack-sized drill sergeant. I resolved notto be broken and to emerge from the program unchanged. I was who I was.

Nearly every day for six months, a small group of other troubled teens and Ilugged our 30-pound backpacks on a trek that covered about 10 miles. We hikedin a rugged wilderness that seemed untouched by civilization. The grandeur ofthe sky, rock and wilderness made me reverent.

Our counselors, were firm, but gentle, not the ogres I had imagined. We learnedhow to make a fire without matches and create a shelter with twigs, branchesand grass. We learned which plants were safe to eat out in the wild. Late into thenight, we talked about our fears and hopes.

We were devoid of radios, televisions and cell phones. I felt myself change. I wascalm and often reflective. My old, impulsive self was gone.

One morning, six months later, my dad came to pick me up. I ran to hug him andsaw relief and love in his eyes.

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


“So what’s it like being sheriff?” I asked on the ride home.

“I lost the race, Danny,” he said.

“I’m sorry, Dad.” I knew my behavior probably had a lot to do with his defeat.

Dad squeezed my shoulder and brought me close. “As long as I don’t ever lose

you, I’m okay.”

Questions:

11)) Which best describes the double-meaning of the title?

A. Danny goes to wilderness camp;it is in a national forest.

B. Danny is out of control; he is

sent into the wilderness.C. Danny changes at wilderness

camp; his father loses a tightrace for sheriff.

D. Danny hikes in the ruggedwilderness; he becomesrespectful of nature and others.

22)) "I was 16 when my fatherunequivocal ly decided that he wouldsend me to wilderness camp for severalmonths."

▼ Choose the best way to rewrite the abovesentence.

A. I was 16 when my father angrilydecided that he would send me towilderness camp for several months.

B. I was 16 when, over the course ofseveral months, my father decided hewould send me to wilderness camp.

C. I was 16 when my father finallydecided that he would send me towilderness camp for several months.

D. I was 16 when my father decided

without question that he would sendme to wilderness camp for severalmonths.

33)) What does the idiomaticexpression, "the last straw," suggest?

A. the biggest problem of all

B. the worst thing someone couldhave done

C. the last in a line of unacceptableoccurrences

D. the deed someone wishes he orshe could take back

44)) Which is the best antonymfor unbridled?

A. amusing B. peaceful C. restrained

D. understandable

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)



55)) What lesson did Danny seem tolearn in this passage?

A. Fight fire with fire.B. Faith will move mountains.C. Nature exceeds nurture.D. A reed before the wind lives on,

while mighty oaks do fall.

66)) What is a euphemism?

A. a code word B. a nickname C. a detailed description D. a less offensive term

77)) What kind of character is JakeHutch in this passage?

A. round, meaning fully developedB. protagonist, meaning the main

characterC. antihero, meaning he lacks

heroic traitsD. flat, meaning only having

enough traits to fulfill his functionin the passage

88)) "The grandeur of the sky, rock andwilderness made me reverent ."

▼ Choose the best way to rewrite the abovesentence.

A. I was humbled by the vastness ofthe sky, rock and wilderness.

B. I felt small in comparison to thesheer size of the sky, rock andwilderness.

C. The power of the sky, rock andwilderness made me regret my pastbehavior.

D. The inherent danger of the sky, rockand wilderness made me nervous.

99)) What is evident by the end of thispassage?


A. □ how much John loves his son

B. □ how much Danny haschanged

C. □ that Danny has made lastingfriendships

D. □ that John has given uprunning for office

1100)) If the counselors at the wildernesscamp had been ogres, how might theyhave behaved?

A. by giving teenagers water only whenthey were thirsty

B. by making the teenagers figure outhow to build a fort in the rain

C. by refusing to treat the teenagerswounds when they got injured

D. by encouraging the teens tosocialize with one another even ifthey didn't want to

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)




““WWoor r tthh WWoor r kkiinngg FFoor r ”” RReeaaddiinngg CCoommppr r eehheennssiioonn – – SShhoor r tt SSttoor r iieess


Paola and Imran have been married for 8 years.They have had many good times together. They have travelled the world together.They have two little girls together.They have started a chocolate business together.

Lately, Paola and Imran have been fighting a lot.Business at the chocolate store is slow. Imran thinks it is Paola’s fault. They are having trouble with money. Paola thinks Imran spends too much.

One evening, Paola decides to visit her mom for advice.Paola knocks on her mom’s door. Paola’s mom is happy. It is a surprise visit. She quickly sees, however, that something is wrong.

Paola looks sad and tired. “Paola, what is the matter?” Mom asks.

Paola tells her mom all that is going on.

Mom smiles gently. She rubs Paola’s back. Then she tells Paola a story.

“Your father and I have a wonderful marriage. But we don’t always get along.There was a time when things were very bad between us. We fought all the time.You were just a little girl. One day we watched you playing on the floor. We knew

we wanted to make our marriage work. We loved you very much. We loved eachother very much. We knew we had to work harder on our marriage.”

“What did you do?” asks Paola.

“We agreed to talk more. We planned a special night each week for the two ofus. We went to see someone who helps people with their marriages,” Mom says.“It was worth it. I can’t imagine not having your father in my life.”

Paola begins to feel better. “You are right,” she says. “What Imran and I have isworth working for.”

Questions:

11)) Why does Paola want to see hermom?

A. to have dinner B. to get advice C. to have a laugh D. to see how she is doing

22)) Where does the talk take place?

A. at Mom's houseB. at a restaurantC. at Paola's houseD. at the chocolate store

7/21/2019 Beginners 1(3)


beginners 1(3)

Documents